HOLTEK HT68F13

Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Revision: 1.00
Date: February 9, 2011
Contents
Table of Contents
Features ...............................................................................................6
CPU Features ........................................................................................................6
Peripheral Features ................................................................................................6
General Description ............................................................................6
Selection Table ....................................................................................7
Block Diagram .....................................................................................7
Pin Assignment ...................................................................................8
Pin Description ....................................................................................9
HT68F13 ................................................................................................................9
HT68F14 ..............................................................................................................10
HT68F15 ..............................................................................................................11
Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................12
D.C. Characteristics ..........................................................................12
A.C. Characteristics ..........................................................................14
Power-on Reset Characteristics ......................................................15
System Architecture .........................................................................16
Clocking and Pipelining ........................................................................................16
Program Counter..................................................................................................17
Stack ....................................................................................................................17
Arithmetic and Logic Unit - ALU ...........................................................................18
Flash Program Memory ....................................................................19
Structure...............................................................................................................19
Special Vectors.....................................................................................................19
Look-up Table.......................................................................................................19
Table Program Example .......................................................................................20
In Circuit Programming.........................................................................................21
RAM Data Memory.............................................................................22
Structure...............................................................................................................22
Rev. 1.10
2
February 9, 2011
Contents
Special Function Register Description ...........................................24
Indirect Addressing Registers - IAR0, IAR1..........................................................24
Memory Pointers - MP0, MP1 ..............................................................................24
Accumulator - ACC ..............................................................................................25
Program Counter Low Register - PCL..................................................................25
Look-up Table Registers - TBLP, TBHP, TBLH.....................................................25
Status Register - STATUS ...................................................................................25
Oscillator............................................................................................27
Oscillator Overview...............................................................................................27
System Clock Configurations................................................................................27
External Crystal/ Ceramic Oscillator - HXT ..........................................................28
External RC Oscillator - ERC ...............................................................................29
Internal RC Oscillator - HIRC ...............................................................................29
Internal 32kHz Oscillator - LIRC...........................................................................29
Supplementary Oscillator......................................................................................29
Operating Modes and System Clocks .............................................30
System Clocks......................................................................................................30
System Operation Modes .....................................................................................30
Control Register ...................................................................................................32
Fast Wake-up .......................................................................................................33
Operating Mode Switching ...............................................................34
NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching...........................................................35
SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching...........................................................36
Entering the SLEEP0 Mode................................................................................37
Entering the SLEEP1 Mode..................................................................................37
Entering the IDLE0 Mode .....................................................................................37
Entering the IDLE1 Mode .....................................................................................38
Standby Current Considerations...........................................................................38
Wake-up...............................................................................................................38
Programming Considerations ...............................................................................39
Watchdog Timer ................................................................................39
Watchdog Timer Clock Source .............................................................................39
Watchdog Timer Control Register.........................................................................40
Watchdog Timer Operation...................................................................................40
Reset and Initialisation .....................................................................42
Reset Functions ...................................................................................................42
Reset Initial Conditions .........................................................................................45
Rev. 1.10
3
February 9, 2011
Contents
Input/Output Ports.............................................................................51
I/O Register List....................................................................................................51
Pull-high Resistors................................................................................................53
Port A Wake-up ....................................................................................................54
I/O Port Control Registers.....................................................................................54
I/O Pin Structures .................................................................................................56
Programming Considerations ...............................................................................56
Timer Modules - TM...........................................................................57
Introduction ..........................................................................................................57
TM Operation .......................................................................................................58
TM Clock Source..................................................................................................58
TM Interrupts ........................................................................................................58
TM External Pins ..................................................................................................58
TM Input/Output Pin Control Registers .................................................................59
Programming Considerations ...............................................................................64
Compact Type TM - CTM...................................................................65
Compact TM Operation ........................................................................................65
Compact Type TM Register Description ...............................................................66
Compact Type TM Operating Modes ....................................................................70
Standard Type TM - STM...................................................................75
Standard TM Operation ........................................................................................75
Standard Type TM Register Description ...............................................................76
Standard Type TM Operating Modes....................................................................80
Enhanced Type TM - ETM .................................................................87
Enhanced TM Operation ......................................................................................87
Enhanced Type TM Register Description..............................................................88
Enhanced Type TM Operating Modes ..................................................................93
Compare Output Mode .........................................................................................94
Capture Input Mode............................................................................................105
Interrupts..........................................................................................107
Interrupt Registers ..............................................................................................107
Interrupt Operation..............................................................................................112
External Interrupt ................................................................................................114
Multi-function Interrupt ........................................................................................115
Time Base Interrupts...........................................................................................115
LVD Interrupt ......................................................................................................116
TM Interrupts ......................................................................................................116
Interrupt Wake-up Function.................................................................................117
Programming Considerations .............................................................................117
Rev. 1.10
4
February 9, 2011
Contents
Power Down Mode and Wake-up ...................................................118
Entering the IDLE or SLEEP Mode .....................................................................118
Standby Current Considerations .........................................................................118
Wake-up .............................................................................................................118
Low Voltage Detector - LVD ............................................................119
LVD Register ......................................................................................................119
LVD Operation....................................................................................................120
SCOM Function for LCD .................................................................120
LCD Operation ...................................................................................................120
LCD Bias Control................................................................................................121
Configuration Options ....................................................................122
Application Circuits ........................................................................122
Instruction Set .................................................................................123
Introduction.........................................................................................................123
Instruction Timing ...............................................................................................123
Moving and Transferring Data ............................................................................123
Arithmetic Operations .........................................................................................123
Logical and Rotate Operations ...........................................................................123
Branches and Control Transfer...........................................................................124
Bit Operations.....................................................................................................124
Table Read Operations.......................................................................................124
Other Operations................................................................................................124
Instruction Set Summary ....................................................................................125
Instruction Definition ......................................................................127
Package Information .......................................................................137
16-pin DIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions .............................................................137
16-pin NSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions .........................................................140
16-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions .........................................................141
20-pin DIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions .............................................................142
20-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions............................................................144
20-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions .........................................................145
24-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions ........................................................146
24-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions............................................................149
24-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions .........................................................150
28-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions ........................................................151
28-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions............................................................152
28-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions .........................................................153
Reel Dimensions ................................................................................................154
Carrier Tape Dimensions ....................................................................................156
Rev. 1.10
5
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Features
CPU Features
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Operating Voltage:
fSYS= 8MHz: 2.2V~5.5V
fSYS= 12MHz: 2.7V~5.5V
fSYS= 20MHz: 4.5V~5.5V
Up to 0.2ms instruction cycle with 20MHz system clock at VDD=5V
Power down and wake-up functions to reduce power consumption
Four oscillators:
External Crystal -- HXT
External RC -- ERC
Internal RC -- HIRC
Internal 32kHz RC -- LIRC
Multi-mode operation: NORMAL, SLOW, IDLE and SLEEP
Fully integrated internal 4MHz, 8MHz and 12MHz oscillator requires no external components
All instructions executed in one or two instruction cycles
Table read instructions
63 powerful instructions
Up to 8-level subroutine nesting
Bit manipulation instruction
Peripheral Features
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Flash Program Memory: 1K´14 ~ 4K´15
RAM Data Memory: 64´8 ~ 192´8
Watchdog Timer function
Up to 26 bidirectional I/O lines
Software controlled 4-SCOM lines LCD driver with 1/2 bias
Multiple pin-shared external interrupts
Multiple Timer Module for time measure, input capture, compare match output, PWM output or
single pulse output function
Single Time-Base function for generation of fixed time interrupt signal
Low voltage reset function
Low voltage detect function
Wide range of available package types
General Description
The HT68F1x series of devices are Flash Memory I/O type 8-bit high performance RISC architecture
microcontrollers. Offering users the convenience of Flash Memory multi-programming features, these
devices also include a wide range of functions and features. Other memory includes an area of RAM
Data Memory for application program data storage.
Multiple and extremely flexible Timer Modules provide timing, pulse generation and PWM
generation functions. Protective features such as an internal Watchdog Timer, Low Voltage Reset and
Low Voltage Detector coupled with excellent noise immunity and ESD protection ensure that reliable
operation is maintained in hostile electrical environments.
A full choice of HXT, ERC, HIRC and LIRC oscillator functions are provided including a fully
integrated system oscillator which requires no external components for its implementation. The ability
to operate and switch dynamically between a range of operating modes using different clock sources
gives users the ability to optimise microcontroller operation and minimise power consumption.
Rev. 1.10
6
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
The inclusion of flexible I/O programming features, Time-Base functions along with many other
features ensure that the devices will find excellent use in applications such as electronic metering,
environmental monitoring, handheld instruments, household appliances, electronically controlled
tools, motor driving in addition to many others.
Selection Table
Most features are common to all devices, the main feature distinguishing them are Memory capacity,
I/O count, TM features, stack capacity and package types. The following table summarises the main
features of each device.
Part No.
VDD
Program
Memory
Data
Memory
I/O
Ext.
Int.
Timer
Module
Stack
Package
HT68F13
2.2V~
5.5V
1K´14
64´8
18
2
10-bit STM´1
4
16DIP/NSOP/SSOP
20DIP/SOP/SSOP
HT68F14
2.2V~
5.5V
2K´15
96´8
22
2
10-bit CTM´1
10-bit STM´1
4
16DIP/NSOP/SSOP
20DIP/SOP/SSOP
24SKDIP/SOP/SSOP
HT68F15
2.2V~
5.5V
4K´15
128´8
26
2
10-bit CTM´1
10-bit ETM´1
8
16DIP/NSOP/SSOP
20DIP/SOP/SSOP
24/28SKDIP/SOP/SSOP
Note:
As devices exist in more than one package format, the table reflects the situation for the package with the most
pins.
Block Diagram
L o w
V o lta g e
D e te c t
F la s h M e m o r y
P r o g r a m m in g
C ir c u itr y ( IC P )
F la s h
P ro g ra m
M e m o ry
R e s e t
C ir c u it
L o w
V o lta g e
R e s e t
T im e
B a s e
W a tc h d o g
T im e r
R A M
D a ta
M e m o ry
8 - b it
R IS C
M C U
C o re
E R C /H X T
O s c illa to r
H IR C
O s c illa to r
I/O
Rev. 1.10
T M 0
In te rru p t
C o n tr o lle r
L IR C
O s c illa to r
T M 1
7
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Pin Assignment
P A 0
1
1 6
P B 0
P A 2
3
1 4
P B 1 /O S C 1
P A 1
2
P A 3
1 5
4
P A 4
1 3
5
P A 5
1 2
6
P A 6 /T C K 1
1 1
7
1 0
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
8
9
P A 2
3
1 4
P B 1 /O S C 1
2
P A 3
1 5
4
P A 4 /T C K 0
1 3
5
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
1 2
6
P A 6 /T C K 1
1 1
7
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
1 0
8
9
V S S
3
1 4
P B 5 /IN T 1
2
P B 0
1 5
4
1 3
P A 0
5
P A 1
1 2
P A 3
6
1 1
P A 2
7
8
1 0
9
P A 7 /T P 1 B _ 0
P A 6 /T C K 1
P A 4 /T C K 0
2 8
P B 0
3
2 6
P B 1 /O S C 1
2 5
P A 4 /T C K 0
4
2 4
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
5
2 3
P A 6 /T C K 1
6
P A 7 /T P 1 B _ 0
P C 5
P C 4
P C 3
P C 2
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1
P C 0 /T P 1 A /S C O M 0
2 2
7
2 1
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
2 0
1 9
1 8
1 7
1 6
1 5
4
1 5
6
1 3
8
9
1 0
1
2 0
P B 0
P A 2
3
1 8
P B 1 /O S C 1
1 9
P C 0 /T P 1 A /S C O M 0
V D D
1 5
6
1 4
7
P A 6 /T C K 1
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1
P B 2 /O S C 2
1 6
5
P A 4 /T C K 0
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
P A 7 /T P 1 B _ 0
V S S
1 7
4
P A 3
9
1 0
1 2
P B 1 /O S C 1
4
2 1
5
2 0
6
1 9
P A 6 /T C K 1
7
1 8
8
1 7
P C 3
9
1 0
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1
1 1
P C 0 /S C O M 0
1 2
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
V S S
P B 2 /O S C 2
V D D
P B 3 /R E S
P B 4 /IN T 0
P B 5 /IN T 1
P D 0
P D 1
P B 6 /T P 1 _ 1 /S C O M 2
P B 7 /S C O M 3
H T 6 8 F 1 4
2 4 S K D IP -A /S O P -A /S S O P -A
P A 0
1
2 4
P B 0
P A 2
3
2 2
P B 1 /O S C 1
P A 1
2
2 3
P A 3
4
2 1
P A 4 /T C K 0
5
2 0
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
6
1 9
P A 6 /T C K 1
P C 2
H T 6 8 F 1 5
2 0 D IP -A /S O P -A /S S O P -A
2 3
P A 4 /T C K 0
P B 5 /IN T 1
P B 7 /T P 1 B _ 2 /S C O M 3
2
P A 3
P A 7 /T P 1 B _ 0
P B 6 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 2
1 1
2 2
P B 3 /R E S
P B 4 /IN T 0
1 3
8
3
P C 2
P A 0
2
P A 2
P B 5 /IN T 1
H T 6 8 F 1 4
2 0 D IP -A /S O P -A /S S O P -A
P A 1
P B 0
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
P B 7 /S C O M 3
1 1
2 4
P B 3 /R E S
P B 6 /T P 1 _ 1 /S C O M 2
1 2
1
P A 1
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
P B 4 /IN T 0
1 4
7
P A 0
P B 2 /O S C 2
V D D
1 6
5
P C 0 /S C O M 0
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
1
P A 3
P B 1 /O S C 1
1 7
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1
P B 3 /R E S
P A 2
2 7
1 8
P A 6 /T C K 1
P B 4 /IN T 0
P A 0
2
3
P A 4 /T C K 0
H T 6 8 F 1 5
1 6 D IP -A /N S O P -A /S S O P -A
P A 1
P A 2
V S S
1 9
2
P A 3
H T 6 8 F 1 4
1 6 D IP -A /N S O P -A /S S O P -A
P B 1 /O S C 1
P B 7 /S C O M 3
P B 0
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
V D D
P B 6 /T P 1 _ 1 /S C O M 2
2 0
P B 3 /R E S
1 6
P B 5 /IN T 1
1 1
1
P A 1
V D D
1
1 0
P A 0
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
P B 2 /O S C 2
9
1 2
H T 6 8 F 1 3
2 0 D IP -A /S O P -A /S S O P -A
P B 2 /O S C 2
P B 5 /IN T 1
P B 4 /IN T 0
1 3
8
P C 0 /S C O M 0
V S S
P B 4 /IN T 0
P B 3 /R E S
1 4
7
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
P B 5 /IN T 1
V D D
1 5
6
P C 1 /S C O M 1
P B 4 /IN T 0
P B 2 /O S C 2
1 6
5
P A 6 /T C K 1
P B 3 /R E S
P B 0
P B 1 /O S C 1
V S S
1 7
4
P A 5
V D D
1 6
P B 0
1 8
1 9
P A 4
P B 2 /O S C 2
1
2 0
3
2
P A 3
H T 6 8 F 1 3
1 6 D IP -A /N S O P -A /S S O P -A
P A 1
1
P A 2
P A 1
V S S
P A 0
P A 0
P C 3
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1 /S C O M 1
P C 0 /T P 1 A /S C O M 0
7
1 8
8
1 7
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
V S S
P B 2 /O S C 2
V D D
P B 3 /R E S
P B 4 /IN T 0
P B 5 /IN T 1
P D 0
P D 1
P B 6 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 2
P B 7 /T P 1 B _ 2 /S C O M 3
H T 6 8 F 1 5
2 4 S K D IP -A /S O P -A /S S O P -A
V S S
P B 2 /O S C 2
V D D
P B 3 /R E S
P B 4 /IN T 0
P B 5 /IN T 1
P C 6
P C 7
P D 0
P D 1
P B 6 /T P 1 B _ 1 /S C O M 2
P B 7 /T P 1 B _ 2 /S C O M 3
H T 6 8 F 1 5
2 8 S K D IP -A /S O P -A /S S O P -A
Rev. 1.10
8
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Pin Description
With the exception of the power pins, all pins on these devices can be referenced by their Port name,
e.g. PA.0, PA.1 etc, which refer to the digital I/O function of the pins. However some of these Port pins
are also shared with other function such as the Analog to Digital Converter, Timer Module pins etc.
The function of each pin is listed in the following table, however the details behind how each pin is
configured is contained in other sections of the datasheet.
HT68F13
Pin Name
Function
OP
I/T
O/T
Pin-Shared Mapping
PA0~PA7
Port A
PAWU
PAPU
ST
CMOS
PB0~PB7
Port B
PBPU
ST
CMOS
¾
PC0~PC1
Port C
PCPU
ST
CMOS
¾
TCK1
TM1 input
¾
ST
¾
TP1_0, TP1_1
TM1 I/O
TMPC
ST
CMOS
PA7, PB6
INT0, INT1
Ext. Interrupt 0, 1
¾
ST
¾
PB4, PB5
SCOM0~SCOM3
SCOM0~SCOM3
SCOMC
¾
SCOM
OSC1
HXT/ERC pin
CO
HXT
¾
PB1
OSC2
HXT pin
CO
¾
HXT
PB2
RES
Reset pin
CO
ST
¾
PB3
VDD
Power supply *
¾
PWR
¾
¾
VSS
Ground *
¾
PWR
¾
¾
Note:
¾
PA6
PC0, PC1, PB6, PB7
I/T: Input type
O/T: Output type
OP: Optional by configuration option (CO) or register option
PWR: Power
CO: Configuration option
ST: Schmitt Trigger input
CMOS: CMOS output
SCOM: Software controlled LCD COM
HXT: High frequency crystal oscillator
Rev. 1.10
9
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
HT68F14
Pin Name
Function
OP
I/T
O/T
Pin-Shared Mapping
ST
CMOS
¾
PA0~PA7
Port A
PAWU
PAPU
PB0~PB7
Port B
PBPU
ST
CMOS
¾
PC0~PC3
Port C
PCPU
ST
CMOS
¾
PD0~PD1
Port D
PDPU
ST
CMOS
¾
TCK0, TCK1
TM0, TM1 input
¾
ST
¾
PA4, PA6
TP0_0, TP0_1
TM0 I/O
TMPC
ST
CMOS
PA5, PC1
TP1_0, TP1_1
TM1 I/O
TMPC
ST
CMOS
PA7, PB6
INT0, INT1
Ext. Interrupt 0, 1
¾
ST
¾
PB4, PB5
SCOM0~SCOM3
SCOM0~SCOM3
SCOMC
¾
SCOM
OSC1
HXT/ERC pin
CO
HXT
¾
PB1
OSC2
HXT pin
CO
¾
HXT
PB2
RES
Reset pin
CO
ST
¾
PB3
VDD
Power supply *
¾
PWR
¾
¾
VSS
Ground *
¾
PWR
¾
¾
Note:
PC0, PC1, PB6, PB7
I/T: Input type
I/T: Input type
O/T: Output type
OP: Optional by configuration option (CO) or register option
PWR: Power
CO: Configuration option
ST: Schmitt Trigger input
CMOS: CMOS output
SCOM: Software controlled LCD COM
HXT: High frequency crystal oscillator
Rev. 1.10
10
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
HT68F15
Pin Name
Function
OP
I/T
O/T
Pin-Shared Mapping
ST
CMOS
¾
PA0~PA7
Port A
PAWU
PAPU
PB0~PB7
Port B
PBPU
ST
CMOS
¾
PC0~PC7
Port C
PCPU
ST
CMOS
¾
PD0~PD1
Port D
PDPU
ST
CMOS
¾
TCK0, TCK1
TM0, TM1 input
¾
ST
¾
PA4, PA6
TP0_0, TP0_1
TM0 I/O
TMPC
ST
CMOS
PA5, PC1
TP1A
TM1 I/O
TMPC
ST
CMOS
PC0
TP1B_0, TP1B_1,
TM1 I/O
TP1B_2
TMPC
ST
CMOS
PA7, PB6, PB7
INT0, INT1
Ext. Interrupt 0, 1
¾
ST
¾
SCOM0~SCOM3
SCOM0~SCOM3
SCOMC
¾
SCOM
OSC1
HXT/ERC pin
CO
HXT
¾
PB1
OSC2
HXT pin
CO
¾
HXT
PB2
RES
Reset pin
CO
ST
¾
PB3
VDD
Power supply *
¾
PWR
¾
¾
VSS
Ground *
¾
PWR
¾
¾
Note:
PB4, PB5
PC0, PC1, PB6, PB7
I/T: Input type
O/T: Output type
OP: Optional by configuration option (CO) or register option
PWR: Power
CO: Configuration option
ST: Schmitt Trigger input
CMOS: CMOS output
SCOM: Software controlled LCD COM
HXT: High frequency crystal oscillator
Rev. 1.10
11
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage ...............................................................................................VSS-0.3V to VSS+6.0V
Input Voltage .................................................................................................VSS-0.3V to VDD+0.3V
Storage Temperature .................................................................................................-50°C to 125°C
Operating Temperature................................................................................................-40°C to 85°C
IOL Total...................................................................................................................................100mA
IOH Total ................................................................................................................................-100mA
Total Power Dissipation .........................................................................................................500mW
Note: These are stress ratings only. Stresses exceeding the range specified under ²Absolute Maximum Ratings² may cause substantial damage to the device. Functional operation of this device at other conditions beyond those listed in the specification is not implied and prolonged exposure to extreme
conditions may affect device reliability.
D.C. Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Test Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
fSYS=8MHz
2.2
¾
5.5
V
fSYS=12MHz
2.7
¾
5.5
V
fSYS=20MHz
4.5
¾
5.5
V
¾
0.7
1.1
mA
¾
1.8
2.7
mA
¾
1.6
2.4
mA
¾
3.3
5.0
mA
¾
2.2
3.3
mA
¾
5.0
7.5
mA
¾
6.0
9.0
mA
¾
10
20
mA
¾
30
50
mA
¾
1.5
3.0
mA
¾
3.0
6.0
mA
¾
0.55
0.83
mA
¾
1.30
2.00
mA
¾
¾
1
mA
¾
¾
2
mA
¾
1.5
3.0
mA
¾
2.5
5.0
mA
VDD
VDD
Operating Voltage
(HXT, ERC, HIRC)
¾
3V
5V
IDD1
Operating Current,
Normal Mode, fSYS=fH
(HXT, ERC, HIRC)
3V
5V
3V
5V
IDD2
Operating Current,
Normal Mode, fSYS=fH
(HXT)
Operating Current, Slow Mode,
fSYS=fL (LIRC)
3V
IDD3
IDLE0 Mode Standby Current
(LIRC on)
3V
IDLE1 Mode Standby Current
(HXT, ERC, HIRC)
3V
SLEEP0 Mode Standby Current
(LIRC off)
3V
SLEEP1 Mode Standby Current
(LIRC on)
3V
IIDLE0
IIDLE1
ISLEEP0
ISLEEP1
VIL1
Rev. 1.10
Input Low Voltage for I/O Ports or
Input Pins except RES pin
5V
5V
Conditions
No load, fSYS=fH=4MHz,
WDT enable
No load, fSYS=fH=8MHz,
WDT enable
No load, fSYS=fH=12MHz,
WDT enable
No load, fSYS=fH=20MHz,
WDT enable
No load, fSYS=fL,
WDT enable
No load, WDT enable
5V
5V
No load, WDT enable,
fSYS=12MHz on
No load, WDT disable
5V
No load, WDT enable
5V
¾
¾
0
¾
0.2VDD
V
5V
¾
0
¾
1.5
V
12
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Test Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Input High Voltage for I/O Ports
or Input Pins except RES pin
¾
¾
0.8VDD
¾
VDD
V
5V
¾
3.5
¾
5.0
V
VIL2
Input Low Voltage (RES)
¾
¾
0
¾
0.4VDD
V
VIH2
Input High Voltage (RES)
¾
¾
0.9VDD
¾
VDD
V
LVR Enable, 2.10V option
-5%
2.10
+5%
V
LVR Enable, 2.55V option
-5%
2.55
+5%
V
LVR Enable, 3.15V option
-5%
3.15
+5%
V
LVR Enable, 4.20V option
-5%
4.20
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.0V
-5%
2.00
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.2V
-5%
2.20
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.4V
-5%
2.40
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.7V
-5%
2.70
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.0V
-5%
3.00
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.3V
-5%
3.30
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.6V
-5%
3.60
+5%
V
LVDEN=1, VLVD=4.4V
-5%
4.40
+5%
V
LVR Enable, LVDEN=0
¾
60
90
mA
LVR disable, LVDEN=1
¾
75
115
mA
LVR enable, LVDEN=1
¾
90
135
mA
3V
IOL=9mA
¾
¾
0.3
V
5V
IOL=20mA
¾
¾
0.5
V
3V
IOH=-3.2mA
2.7
¾
¾
V
5V
IOH=-7.4mA
4.5
¾
¾
V
20
60
100
kW
10
30
50
kW
SCOMC, ISEL[1:0]=00
17.5
25.0
32.5
mA
SCOMC, ISEL[1:0]=01
35
50
65
mA
SCOMC, ISEL[1:0]=10
70
100
130
mA
SCOMC, ISEL[1:0]=11
140
200
260
mA
0.475
0.500
0.525
VDD
VIH1
VLVR
VLVD
ILV
VOL
VOH
RPH
ISCOM
VSCOM
Rev. 1.10
LVR Voltage Level
LVD Voltage Level
Additional Power Consumption if
LVR and LVD is Used
¾
¾
¾
Output Low Voltage I/O Port
Output High Voltage I/O Port
Pull-high Resistance for I/O
Ports
SCOM Operating Current
VDD/2 Voltage for LCD COM
3V
¾
5V
5V
5V
No load
13
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
A.C. Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Test Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
2.2V~5.5V
DC
¾
8
MHz
2.7V~5.5V
DC
¾
12
MHz
4.5V~5.5V
DC
¾
20
MHz
2.2V~5.5V
0.4
¾
8
MHz
2.7V~5.5V
0.4
¾
12
MHz
4.5V~5.5V
0.4
¾
20
MHz
3V/5V Ta=25°C
-2%
4
+2%
MHz
3V/5V Ta=25°C
-2%
8
+2%
MHz
-2%
12
+2%
MHz
3V/5V Ta=0~70°C
-5%
4
+5%
MHz
3V/5V Ta=0~70°C
-4%
8
+4%
MHz
Ta=0~70°C
-5%
12
+3%
MHz
2.2V~
Ta=0~70°C
3.6V
-7%
4
+7%
MHz
3.0V~
Ta=0~70°C
5.5V
-5%
4
+9%
MHz
2.2V~
Ta=0~70°C
3.6V
-6%
8
+4%
MHz
3.0V~
Ta=0~70°C
5.5V
-4%
8
+9%
MHz
3.0V~
Ta=0~70°C
5.5V
-6%
12
+7%
MHz
2.2V~
Ta= -40°C~85°C
3.6V
-12%
4
+8%
MHz
3.0V~
Ta= -40°C~85°C
5.5V
-10%
4
+9%
MHz
2.2V~
Ta= -40°C~85°C
3.6V
-15%
8
+4%
MHz
3.0V~
Ta= -40°C~85°C
5.5V
-8%
8
+9%
MHz
3.0V~
Ta= -40°C~85°C
5.5V
-12%
12
+7%
MHz
VDD
fCPU
fSYS
Operating Clock
System Clock (HXT)
¾
¾
5V
5V
fHIRC
fERC
Rev. 1.10
System Clock
(HIRC)
System Clock (ERC)
Conditions
Ta=25°C
5V
Ta=25°C, R=120kW *
-2%
8
+2%
MHz
5V
Ta=0~70°C, R=120kW *
-5%
8
+6%
MHz
5V
Ta= -40°C~85°C,
R=120kW *
-7%
8
+9%
MHz
3.0V~ Ta= -40°C~85°C,
5.5V
R=120kW *
-9%
8
+10%
MHz
2.2V~ Ta= -40°C~85°C,
5.5V
R=120kW *
-15%
8
+10%
MHz
14
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Test Conditions
Symbol
fLIRC
Parameter
System Clock (LIRC)
VDD
Conditions
5V
¾
2.2V~
Ta=-40°C~+85°C
5.5V
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
-10%
32
+10%
kHz
-50%
32
+60%
kHz
fTIMER
Timer Input Pin Frequency
¾
¾
¾
¾
1
fSYS
tRES
External Reset Low Pulse Width
¾
¾
1
¾
¾
ms
tINT
Interrupt Pulse Width
¾
¾
1
¾
¾
tSYS
tLVR
Low Voltage Width to Reset
¾
¾
120
240
480
ms
tLVD
Low Voltage Width to Interrupt
¾
¾
20
45
90
ms
tLVDS
LVDO stable time
¾
¾
15
¾
¾
ms
tBGS
VBG Turn on Stable Time
¾
¾
200
¾
¾
ms
fSYS=HXT
¾
1024
¾
tSST
System Start-up Timer Period
(Wake-up from HALT)
fSYS=ERC or HIRC
¾
15~16
¾
fSYS=LIRC OSC
¾
1~2
¾
Note:
¾
tSYS
1. tSYS=1/fSYS
2. * For fERC, as the resistor tolerance will influence the frequency a precision resistor is recommended.
3. To maintain the accuracy of the internal HIRC oscillator frequency, a 0.1mF decoupling capacitor should be
connected between VDD and VSS and located as close to the device as possible.
Power-on Reset Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Test Conditions
Symbol
Parameter
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VPOR
VDD Start Voltage to Ensure
Power-on Reset
¾
¾
¾
¾
100
mV
RRVDD
VDD Raising Rate to Ensure
Power-on Reset
¾
¾
0.035
¾
¾
V/ms
tPOR
Minimum Time for VDD Stays at
VPOR to Ensure Power-on Reset
¾
¾
1
¾
¾
ms
V
D D
tP
O R
R R
V D D
V
Rev. 1.10
P O R
T im e
15
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
System Architecture
A key factor in the high-performance features of the Holtek range of microcontrollers is attributed to
their internal system architecture. The range of devices take advantage of the usual features found
within RISC microcontrollers providing increased speed of operation and enhanced performance. The
pipelining scheme is implemented in such a way that instruction fetching and instruction execution are
overlapped, hence instructions are effectively executed in one cycle, with the exception of branch or
call instructions. An 8-bit wide ALU is used in practically all instruction set operations, which carries
out arithmetic operations, logic operations, rotation, increment, decrement, branch decisions, etc. The
internal data path is simplified by moving data through the Accumulator and the ALU. Certain internal
registers are implemented in the Data Memory and can be directly or indirectly addressed. The simple
addressing methods of these registers along with additional architectural features ensure that a
minimum of external components is required to provide a functional I/O control system with
maximum reliability and flexibility. This makes the device suitable for low-cost, high-volume
production for controller applications.
Clocking and Pipelining
The main system clock, derived from either a HXT, ERC, HIRC or LIRC oscillator is subdivided into
four internally generated non-overlapping clocks, T1~T4. The Program Counter is incremented at the
beginning of the T1 clock during which time a new instruction is fetched. The remaining T2~T4
clocks carry out the decoding and execution functions. In this way, one T1~T4 clock cycle forms one
instruction cycle. Although the fetching and execution of instructions takes place in consecutive
instruction cycles, the pipelining structure of the microcontroller ensures that instructions are
effectively executed in one instruction cycle. The exception to this are instructions where the contents
of the Program Counter are changed, such as subroutine calls or jumps, in which case the instruction
will take one more instruction cycle to execute.
fS Y S
C lo c k )
(S y s te m
P h a s e C lo c k T 1
P h a s e C lo c k T 2
P h a s e C lo c k T 3
P h a s e C lo c k T 4
P ro g ra m
C o u n te r
P ip e lin in g
P C
P C + 1
F e tc h In s t. (P C )
E x e c u te In s t. (P C -1 )
P C + 2
F e tc h In s t. (P C + 1 )
E x e c u te In s t. (P C )
F e tc h In s t. (P C + 2 )
E x e c u te In s t. (P C + 1 )
System Clocking and Pipelining
1
3
M O V A ,[1 2 H ]
C A L L D E L A Y
C P L [1 2 H ]
5
:
2
4
F e tc h In s t. 1
E x e c u te In s t. 1
F e tc h In s t. 2
:
6
E x e c u te In s t. 2
F e tc h In s t. 3
N O P
D E L A Y :
F lu s h P ip e lin e
F e tc h In s t. 6
E x e c u te In s t. 6
F e tc h In s t. 7
Instruction Fetching
Rev. 1.10
16
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
For instructions involving branches, such as jump or call instructions, two machine cycles are required
to complete instruction execution. An extra cycle is required as the program takes one cycle to first
obtain the actual jump or call address and then another cycle to actually execute the branch. The
requirement for this extra cycle should be taken into account by programmers in timing sensitive
applications.
Program Counter
During program execution, the Program Counter is used to keep track of the address of the next
instruction to be executed. It is automatically incremented by one each time an instruction is executed
except for instructions, such as ²JMP² or ²CALL² that demand a jump to a non-consecutive Program
Memory address. Only the lower 8 bits, known as the Program Counter Low Register, are directly
addressable by the application program.
When executing instructions requiring jumps to non-consecutive addresses such as a jump instruction,
a subroutine call, interrupt or reset, etc., the microcontroller manages program control by loading the
required address into the Program Counter. For conditional skip instructions, once the condition has
been met, the next instruction, which has already been fetched during the present instruction
execution, is discarded and a dummy cycle takes its place while the correct instruction is obtained.
Program Counter
Device
Program Counter
High Byte
HT68F13
PC9, PC8
HT68F14
PC10~PC8
HT68F15
PC11~PC8
Low Byte
(PCL Register)
PCL7~PCL0
Program Counter
The lower byte of the Program Counter, known as the Program Counter Low register or PCL, is
available for program control and is a readable and writeable register. By transferring data directly into
this register, a short program jump can be executed directly, however, as only this low byte is available
for manipulation, the jumps are limited to the present page of memory, that is 256 locations. When such
program jumps are executed it should also be noted that a dummy cycle will be inserted. Manipulating
the PCL register may cause program branching, so an extra cycle is needed to pre-fetch.
Stack
This is a special part of the memory which is used to save the contents of the Program Counter only.
The stack has multiple levels depending upon the device and is neither part of the data nor part of the
program space, and is neither readable nor writeable. The activated level is indexed by the Stack
Pointer, and is neither readable nor writeable. At a subroutine call or interrupt acknowledge signal, the
contents of the Program Counter are pushed onto the stack. At the end of a subroutine or an interrupt
routine, signaled by a return instruction, RET or RETI, the Program Counter is restored to its previous
value from the stack. After a device reset, the Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack.
If the stack is full and an enabled interrupt takes place, the interrupt request flag will be recorded but
the acknowledge signal will be inhibited. When the Stack Pointer is decremented, by RET or RETI, the
interrupt will be serviced. This feature prevents stack overflow allowing the programmer to use the
structure more easily. However, when the stack is full, a CALL subroutine instruction can still be
executed which will result in a stack overflow. Precautions should be taken to avoid such cases which
might cause unpredictable program branching.
Rev. 1.10
17
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
If the stack is overflow, the first Program Counter save in the stack will be lost.
P ro g ra m
T o p o f S ta c k
S ta c k L e v e l 1
S ta c k L e v e l 2
S ta c k
P o in te r
P ro g ra m
M e m o ry
S ta c k L e v e l 3
B o tto m
o f S ta c k
C o u n te r
S ta c k L e v e l N
Device
Stack Levels
HT68F13
4
HT68F14
4
HT68F15
8
Arithmetic and Logic Unit - ALU
The arithmetic-logic unit or ALU is a critical area of the microcontroller that carries out arithmetic
and logic operations of the instruction set. Connected to the main microcontroller data bus, the ALU
receives related instruction codes and performs the required arithmetic or logical operations after
which the result will be placed in the specified register. As these ALU calculation or operations may
result in carry, borrow or other status changes, the status register will be correspondingly updated to
reflect these changes. The ALU supports the following functions:
Rev. 1.10
·
Arithmetic operations: ADD, ADDM, ADC, ADCM, SUB, SUBM, SBC, SBCM, DAA
·
Logic operations: AND, OR, XOR, , ORM, XORM, CPL, CPLA
·
Rotation RRA, RR, RRCA, RRC, RLA, RL, RLCA, RLC
·
Increment and Decrement INCA, INC, DECA, DEC
·
Branch decision, JMP, SZ, SZA, SNZ, SIZ, SDZ, SIZA, SDZA, CALL, RET, RETI
18
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Flash Program Memory
The Program Memory is the location where the user code or program is stored. For this device series
the Program Memory is Flash type, which means it can be programmed and re-programmed a large
number of times, allowing the user the convenience of code modification on the same device. By using
the appropriate programming tools, these Flash devices offer users the flexibility to conveniently
debug and develop their applications while also offering a means of field programming and updating.
Structure
The Program Memory has a capacity of 1K´14 bits to 4K´15 bits. The Program Memory is addressed
by the Program Counter and also contains data, table information and interrupt entries. Table data,
which can be setup in any location within the Program Memory, is addressed by a separate table
pointer register.
Device
Capacity
HT68F20
1K´14
HT68F30
2K´15
HT68F40
4K´15
H T 6 8 F 1 3
H T 6 8 F 1 4
H T 6 8 F 1 5
0 0 0 0 H
R e s e t
R e s e t
R e s e t
0 0 1 C H
In te rru p t
V e c to r
In te rru p t
V e c to r
In te rru p t
V e c to r
0 3 F F H
1 4 b its
0 0 0 4 H
0 7 F F H
1 5 b its
0 F F F H
1 5 b its
Program Memory Structure
Special Vectors
Within the Program Memory, certain locations are reserved for the reset and interrupts. The location
000H is reserved for use by the device reset for program initialisation. After a device reset is initiated,
the program will jump to this location and begin execution.
Look-up Table
Any location within the Program Memory can be defined as a look-up table where programmers can
store fixed data. To use the look-up table, the table pointer must first be setup by placing the address of
the look up data to be retrieved in the table pointer register, TBLP and TBHP. These registers define the
total address of the look-up table.
After setting up the table pointer, the table data can be retrieved from the Program Memory using the
²TABRD[m]² or ²TABRDL[m]² instructions, respectively. When the instruction is executed, the
lower order table byte from the Program Memory will be transferred to the user defined Data Memory
register [m] as specified in the instruction. The higher order table data byte from the Program Memory
will be transferred to the TBLH special register. Any unused bits in this transferred higher order byte
will be read as ²0².
Rev. 1.10
19
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
The accompanying diagram illustrates the addressing data flow of the look-up table.
P ro g ra m
A d d re s s
L a s t p a g e o r
T B H P R e g is te r
T B L P R e g is te r
R e g is te r T B L H
H ig h B y te
M e m o ry
D a ta
1 4 ~ 1 5 b its
U s e r S e le c te d
R e g is te r
L o w
B y te
Table Program Example
The following example shows how the table pointer and table data is defined and retrieved from the
microcontroller. This example uses raw table data located in the Program Memory which is stored
there using the ORG statement. The value at this ORG statement is ²700H² which refers to the start
address of the last page within the 2K Program Memory of the HT68F14. The table pointer is setup
here to have an initial value of ²06H². This will ensure that the first data read from the data table will be
at the Program Memory address ²706H² or 6 locations after the start of the last page. Note that the
value for the table pointer is referenced to the first address of the present page if the ²TABRD [m]²
instruction is being used. The high byte of the table data which in this case is equal to zero will be
transferred to the TBLH register automatically when the ²TABRD [m]² instruction is executed.
Because the TBLH register is a read-only register and cannot be restored, care should be taken to
ensure its protection if both the main routine and Interrupt Service Routine use table read instructions.
If using the table read instructions, the Interrupt Service Routines may change the value of the TBLH
and subsequently cause errors if used again by the main routine. As a rule it is recommended that
simultaneous use of the table read instructions should be avoided. However, in situations where
simultaneous use cannot be avoided, the interrupts should be disabled prior to the execution of any
main routine table-read instructions. Note that all table related instructions require two instruction
cycles to complete their operation.
Table Read Program Example
db ?
tempreg1
tempreg2
db ?
:
:
mov
a,06h
mov
tblp,a
mov
a,07h
mov
tbhp,a
:
:
tabrd tempreg1
dec tblp
tabrd tempreg2
:
:
org 700h
; temporary register #1
; temporary register #2
; initialise low table pointer - note that this address
; is referenced
; initialise high table pointer
; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer data at
; program memory address ²706H² transferred to tempreg1 and TBLH
; reduce value of table pointer by one
; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer data at
; program memory address ²705H² transferred to tempreg2 and TBLH
; in this example the data ²1AH² is transferred to tempreg1 and
; data ²0FH² to register tempreg2
; sets initial address of program memory
dc 00Ah, 00Bh, 00Ch, 00Dh, 00Eh, 00Fh, 01Ah, 01Bh
:
:
Rev. 1.10
20
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
In Circuit Programming
The provision of Flash type Program Memory provides the user with a means of convenient and easy
upgrades and modifications to their programs on the same device. As an additional convenience,
Holtek has provided a means of programming the microcontroller in-circuit using a 5-pin interface.
This provides manufacturers with the possibility of manufacturing their circuit boards complete with a
programmed or un-programmed microcontroller, and then programming or upgrading the program at
a later stage. This enables product manufacturers to easily keep their manufactured products supplied
with the latest program releases without removal and re-insertion of the device.
The Holtek Flash MCU to Writer Programming Pin correspondence table is as follows:
Holtek Writer
Devices
Pin Name
Pin Name
SDATA
PA0
Serial Address and data -- read/write
SCLK
PA2
Address and data serial clock input
VPP
RES
Reset input
VDD
VDD
Power Supply (5.0V)
VSS
VSS
Ground
Pin Description
The Program Memory can be programmed serially in-circuit using this 5-wire interface. Data is
downloaded and uploaded serially on a single pin with an additional line for the clock. Two additional lines are required for the power supply and one line for the reset. The technical details regarding the in-circuit programming of the devices are beyond the scope of this document and will be
supplied in supplementary literature.
During the programming process the RES pin will be held low by the programmer disabling the
normal operation of the microcontroller and taking control of the PA0 and PA2 I/O pins for data and
clock programming purposes. The user must there take care to ensure that no other outputs are
connected to these two pins.
W r ite r C o n n e c to r
S ig n a ls
M C U
V D D
V D D
V P P
R E S
S D A T A
P A 0
S C L K
P A 2
V S S
V S S
*
*
P r o g r a m m in g
P in s
*
T o o th e r C ir c u it
Note:
Rev. 1.10
* may be resistor or capacitor. The resistance of * must be greater than 1kW or the capacitance
of * must be less than 1nF.
21
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
RAM Data Memory
The Data Memory is a volatile area of 8-bit wide RAM internal memory and is the location where
temporary information is stored.
Structure
Divided into two sections, the first of these is an area of RAM, known as the Special Function Data
Memory. Here are located registers which are necessary for correct operation of the device. Many of
these registers can be read from and written to directly under program control, however, some remain
protected from user manipulation.
The second area of Data Memory is known as the General Purpose Data Memory, which is reserved
for general purpose use. All locations within this area are read and write accessible under program
control.
Device
Capacity
Address
HT68F13
64´8
40H~7FH
HT68F14
96´8
40H~9FH
HT68F15
192´8
40H~FFH
General Purpose Data Memory Structure
Rev. 1.10
22
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
0 0 H
0 1 H
0 2 H
0 3 H
0 4 H
0 5 H
0 6 H
0 7 H
0 8 H
0 9 H
0 A H
0 B H
0 C H
0 D H
0 E H
0 F H
1 0 H
1 1 H
1 2 H
1 3 H
1 4 H
1 5 H
1 6 H
1 7 H
1 8 H
1 9 H
1 A H
1 B H
1 C H
1 D H
1 E H
1 F H
2 0 H
2 1 H
2 2 H
2 3 H
2 4 H
2 5 H
2 6 H
2 7 H
2 8 H
2 9 H
2 A H
2 B H
2 C H
2 D H
2 E H
2 F H
3 0 H
3 1 H
3 2 H
3 3 H
3 4 H
3 5 H
3 6 H
3 7 H
3 8 H
3 9 H
3 A H
3 B H
3 C H
3 D H
3 E H
3 F H
H T 6 8 F 1 3
IA R 0
M P 0
IA R 1
M P 1
U n u s e d
A C C
P C L
T B L P
T B L H
T B H P
S T A T U S
S M O D
L V D C
IN T E G
W D T C
T B C
IN T C 0
IN T C 1
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
P A W U
P A P U
P A
P A C
P B P U
P B
P B C
P C P U
P C
P C C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
T M P C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
T M 1 C 0
T M 1 C 1
U n u s e d
T M 1 D L
T M 1 D H
T M 1 A L
T M 1 A H
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
S C O M C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
0 0 H
0 1 H
0 2 H
0 3 H
0 4 H
0 5 H
0 6 H
0 7 H
0 8 H
0 9 H
0 A H
0 B H
0 C H
0 D H
0 E H
0 F H
1 0 H
1 1 H
1 2 H
1 3 H
1 4 H
1 5 H
1 6 H
1 7 H
1 8 H
1 9 H
1 A H
1 B H
1 C H
1 D H
1 E H
1 F H
2 0 H
2 1 H
2 2 H
2 3 H
2 4 H
2 5 H
2 6 H
2 7 H
2 8 H
2 9 H
2 A H
2 B H
2 C H
2 D H
2 E H
2 F H
3 0 H
3 1 H
3 2 H
3 3 H
3 4 H
3 5 H
3 6 H
3 7 H
3 8 H
3 9 H
3 A H
3 B H
3 C H
3 D H
3 E H
3 F H
H T 6 8 F 1 4
IA R 0
M P 0
IA R 1
M P 1
U n u s e d
A C C
P C L
T B L P
T B L H
T B H P
S T A T U S
S M O D
L V D C
IN T E G
W D T C
T B C
IN T C 0
IN T C 1
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
M F I0
M F I1
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
P A W U
P A P U
P A
P A C
P B P U
P B
P B C
P C P U
P C
P C C
P D P U
P D
P D C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
T M P C
T M 0 C 0
T M 0 C 1
T M 0 D L
T M 0 D H
T M 0 A L
A M 0 A H
T M 1 C 0
T M 1 C 1
U n u s e d
T M 1 D L
T M 1 D H
T M 1 A L
T M 1 A H
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
S C O M C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
0 0 H
0 1 H
0 2 H
0 3 H
0 4 H
0 5 H
0 6 H
0 7 H
0 8 H
0 9 H
0 A H
0 B H
0 C H
0 D H
0 E H
0 F H
1 0 H
1 1 H
1 2 H
1 3 H
1 4 H
1 5 H
1 6 H
1 7 H
1 8 H
1 9 H
1 A H
1 B H
1 C H
1 D H
1 E H
1 F H
2 0 H
2 1 H
2 2 H
2 3 H
2 4 H
2 5 H
2 6 H
2 7 H
2 8 H
2 9 H
2 A H
2 B H
2 C H
2 D H
2 E H
2 F H
3 0 H
3 1 H
3 2 H
3 3 H
3 4 H
3 5 H
3 6 H
3 7 H
3 8 H
3 9 H
3 A H
3 B H
3 C H
3 D H
3 E H
3 F H
H T 6 8 F 1 5
IA R 0
M P 0
IA R 1
M P 1
U n u s e d
A C C
P C L
T B L P
T B L H
T B H P
S T A T U S
S M O D
L V D C
IN T E G
W D T C
T B C
IN T C 0
IN T C 1
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
M F I0
M F I1
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
P A W U
P A P U
P A
P A C
P B P U
P B
P B C
P C P U
P C
P C C
P D P U
P D
P D C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
T M P C
T M 0 C 0
T M 0 C 1
T M 0 D L
T M 0 D H
T M 0 A L
T M 0 A H
T M 1 C 0
T M 1 C 1
T M 1 C 2
T M 1 D L
T M 1 D H
T M 1 A L
T M 1 A H
T M 1 B L
T M 1 B H
S C O M C
U n u s e d
U n u s e d
Special Purpose Data Memory Structure
Rev. 1.10
23
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Special Function Register Description
Most of the Special Function Register details will be described in the relevant functional section.
However, several registers require a separate description in this section.
Indirect Addressing Registers - IAR0, IAR1
The Indirect Addressing Registers, IAR0 and IAR1, although having their locations in normal RAM
register space, do not actually physically exist as normal registers. The method of indirect addressing
for RAM data manipulation uses these Indirect Addressing Registers and Memory Pointers, in
contrast to direct memory addressing, where the actual memory address is specified. Actions on the
IAR0 and IAR1 registers will result in no actual read or write operation to these registers but rather to
the memory location specified by their corresponding Memory Pointers, MP0 or MP1. As the Indirect
Addressing Registers are not physically implemented, reading the Indirect Addressing Registers
indirectly will return a result of 00H and writing to the registers indirectly will result in no operation.
Indirect Addressing Program Example
data .section ¢data¢
adres1 db ?
adres2 db ?
adres3 db ?
adres4 db ?
block db ?
code .section at 0 ¢code¢
org 00h
start:
mov
mov
mov
mov
a,04h
block,a
a,offset adres1
mp0,a
clr
inc
sdz
jm
IAR0
mp0
block
p loop
; setup size of block
; Accumulator loaded with first RAM address
; setup memory pointer with first RAM address
loop:
; clear the data at address defined by MP0
; increment memory pointer
; check if last memory location has been cleared
continue:
The important point to note here is that in the example shown above, no reference is made to specific
RAM addresses.
Memory Pointers - MP0, MP1
Two Memory Pointers, known as MP0 and MP1 are provided. These Memory Pointers are physically
implemented in the Data Memory and can be manipulated in the same way as normal registers
providing a convenient way with which to address and track data. When any operation to the relevant
Indirect Addressing Registers is carried out, the actual address that the microcontroller is directed to is
the address specified by the related Memory Pointer. Note that for the HT68F13 device, bit 7 of the
Memory Pointers is not required to address the full memory space. When bit 7 of the Memory Pointers
for HT68F13 device is read, a value of 1 will be returned. The following example shows how to clear a
section of four Data Memory locations already defined as locations adres1 to adres4.
Rev. 1.10
24
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Accumulator - ACC
The Accumulator is central to the operation of any microcontroller and is closely related with
operations carried out by the ALU. The Accumulator is the place where all intermediate results from
the ALU are stored. Without the Accumulator it would be necessary to write the result of each
calculation or logical operation such as addition, subtraction, shift, etc., to the Data Memory resulting
in higher programming and timing overheads. Data transfer operations usually involve the temporary
storage function of the Accumulator; for example, when transferring data between one user defined
register and another, it is necessary to do this by passing the data through the Accumulator as no direct
transfer between two registers is permitted.
Program Counter Low Register - PCL
To provide additional program control functions, the low byte of the Program Counter is made
accessible to programmers by locating it within the Special Purpose area of the Data Memory. By
manipulating this register, direct jumps to other program locations are easily implemented. Loading a
value directly into this PCL register will cause a jump to the specified Program Memory location.
However, as the register is only 8-bit wide, only jumps within the current Program Memory page are
permitted. When such operations are used, note that a dummy cycle will be inserted.
Look-up Table Registers - TBLP, TBHP, TBLH
These three special function registers are used to control operation of the look-up table which is stored
in the Program Memory. TBLP and TBHP are the table pointer and indicates the location where the
table data is located. Their value must be setup before any table read commands are executed. Their
value can be changed, for example using the ²INC² or ²DEC² instructions, allowing for easy table data
pointing and reading. TBLH is the location where the high order byte of the table data is stored after a
table read data instruction has been executed. Note that the lower order table data byte is transferred to
a user defined location.
Status Register - STATUS
This 8-bit register contains the zero flag (Z), carry flag (C), auxiliary carry flag (AC), overflow flag
(OV), power down flag (PDF), and watchdog time-out flag (TO). These arithmetic/logical operation
and system management flags are used to record the status and operation of the microcontroller.
With the exception of the TO and PDF flags, bits in the status register can be altered by instructions like
most other registers. Any data written into the status register will not change the TO or PDF flag. In
addition, operations related to the status register may give different results due to the different
instruction operations. The TO flag can be affected only by a system power-up, a WDT time-out or by
executing the ²CLR WDT² or ²HALT² instruction. The PDF flag is affected only by executing the
²HALT² or ²CLR WDT² instruction or during a system power-up.
The Z, OV, AC and C flags generally reflect the status of the latest operations.
Rev. 1.10
·
C is set if an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take
place during a subtraction operation; otherwise C is cleared. C is also affected by a rotate through
carry instruction.
·
AC is set if an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from the
high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction; otherwise AC is cleared.
·
Z is set if the result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero; otherwise Z is cleared.
·
OV is set if an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit, or vice versa; otherwise OV is cleared.
25
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
·
PDF is cleared by a system power-up or executing the ²CLR WDT² instruction. PDF is set by
executing the ²HALT² instruction.
TO is cleared by a system power-up or executing the ²CLR WDT² or ²HALT² instruction. TO is set
by a WDT time-out.
In addition, on entering an interrupt sequence or executing a subroutine call, the status register will not
be pushed onto the stack automatically. If the contents of the status registers are important and if the
subroutine can corrupt the status register, precautions must be taken to correctly save it.
·
STATUS Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
TO
PDF
OV
Z
AC
C
R/W
¾
¾
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
0
0
x
x
x
x
²x² unknown
Bit 7, 6
Bit 5
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TO: Watchdog Time-Out flag
0: After power up or executing the ²CLR WDT² or ²HALT² instruction
1: A watchdog time-out occurred.
Bit 4
PDF: Power down flag
0: After power up or executing the ²CLR WDT² instruction
1: By executing the ²HALT² instruction
OV: Overflow flag
0: no overflow
1: an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit or vice versa.
Z: Zero flag
0: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is not zero
1: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero
AC: Auxiliary flag
0: no auxiliary carry
1: an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from the
high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction
C: Carry flag
0: no carry-out
1: an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take place
during a subtraction operation
C is also affected by a rotate through carry instruction.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
26
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Oscillator
Various oscillator options offer the user a wide range of functions according to their various
application requirements. The flexible features of the oscillator functions ensure that the best
optimisation can be achieved in terms of speed and power saving. Oscillator selections and operation
are selected through a combination of configuration options and registers.
Oscillator Overview
In addition to being the source of the main system clock the oscillators also provide clock sources for
the Watchdog Timer and Time Base Interrupts. External oscillators requiring some external
components as well as fully integrated internal oscillators, requiring no external components, are
provided to form a wide range of both fast and slow system oscillators. All oscillator options are
selected through the configuration options. The higher frequency oscillators provide higher
performance but carry with it the disadvantage of higher power requirements, while the opposite is of
course true for the lower frequency oscillators. With the capability of dynamically switching between
fast and slow system clock, the device has the flexibility to optimize the performance/ power ratio, a
feature especially important in power sensitive portable applications.
Name
Freq.
Pins
External Crystal
Type
HXT
400kHz~20MHz
OSC1/OSC2
External RC
ERC
8MHz
OSC1
Internal High Speed RC
HIRC
4, 8 or 12MHz
¾
Internal Low Speed RC
LIRC
32kHz
¾
Oscillator Types
System Clock Configurations
There are four system oscillators, three high speed oscillators and one low speed oscillator. The high
speed oscillators are the external crystal/ceramic oscillator - HXT, the external - ERC, and the internal
RC oscillator - HIRC. The low speed oscillator is the internal 32 kHz oscillator - LIRC. Selecting
whether the low or high speed oscillator is used as the system oscillator is implemented using the
HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register and as the system clock can be dynamically
selected.
High Speed
Oscillator
HXT
fH
ERC
6-stage Prescaler
fH/2
HIRC
fH/4
High Speed Oscillator
Configuration Option
fH/8
fH/16
fH/32
fH/64
LIRC
Low Speed
Oscillator
fLIRC
fSYS
fL
HLCLK,
CKS2~CKS0 bits
fSUB
Fast Wake-up from SLEEP Mode or
IDLE Mode Control (for HXT only)
System Clock Configurations
Rev. 1.10
27
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
The actual source clock used for each of the high speed and low speed oscillators is chosen via
configuration options. The frequency of the slow speed or high speed system clock is also determined
using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. Note that two oscillator selections
must be made namely one high speed and one low speed system oscillators. It is not possible to choose
a no-oscillator selection for either the high or low speed oscillator.
External Crystal/ Ceramic Oscillator - HXT
The External Crystal/Ceramic System Oscillator is one of the high frequency oscillator choices, which
is selected via configuration option. For most crystal oscillator configurations, the simple connection
of a crystal across OSC1 and OSC2 will create the necessary phase shift and feedback for oscillation,
without requiring external capacitors. However, for some crystal types and frequencies, to ensure
oscillation, it may be necessary to add two small value capacitors, C1 and C2. Using a ceramic
resonator will usually require two small value capacitors, C1 and C2, to be connected as shown for
oscillation to occur. The values of C1 and C2 should be selected in consultation with the crystal or
resonator manufacturer¢s specification.
C 1
O S C 1
R p
C 2
R f
O S C 2
In te r n a l
O s c illa to r
C ir c u it
T o in te r n a l
c ir c u its
N o te : 1 . R p is n o r m a lly n o t r e q u ir e d . C 1 a n d C 2 a r e r e q u ir e d .
2 . A lth o u g h n o t s h o w n O S C 1 /O S C 2 p in s h a v e a p a r a s itic
c a p a c ita n c e o f a r o u n d 7 p F .
Crystal/Resonator Oscillator - HXT
Crystal Oscillator C1 and C2 Values
Crystal Frequency
C1
C2
12MHz
0pF
0pF
8MHz
0pF
0pF
4MHz
0pF
0pF
1MHz
100pF
100pF
Note:
C1 and C2 values are for guidance only.
Crystal Recommended Capacitor Values
Rev. 1.10
28
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
External RC Oscillator - ERC
Using the ERC oscillator only requires that a resistor, with a value between 24kW and 2.4MW, is
connected between OSC1 and VDD, and a capacitor is connected between OSC1 and ground, providing
a low cost oscillator configuration. It is only the external resistor that determines the oscillation
frequency; the external capacitor has no influence over the frequency and is connected for stability
purposes only. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal
frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage,
temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are minimised. As a resistance/
frequency reference point, it can be noted that with an external 120kW resistor connected and with a
5V voltage power supply and temperature of 25°C degrees, the oscillator will have a frequency of
8MHz within a tolerance of 2%. Here only the OSC1 pin is used, which is shared with I/O pin PB1,
leaving pin PB2 free for use as a normal I/O pin.
V
R
D D
O S C
O S C 1
2 0 p F
P B 2
External RC Oscillator - ERC
Internal RC Oscillator - HIRC
The internal RC oscillator is a fully integrated system oscillator requiring no external components. The
internal RC oscillator has three fixed frequencies of either 4MHz, 8MHz or 12MHz. Device trimming
during the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are
used to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on
the oscillation frequency are minimised. As a result, at a power supply of either 3V or 5V and at a
temperature of 25°C degrees, the fixed oscillation frequency of 4MHz, 8MHz or 12MHz will have a
tolerance within 2%. Note that if this internal system clock option is selected, as it requires no external
pins for its operation, I/O pins PB1 and PB2 are free for use as normal I/O pins.
Internal 32kHz Oscillator - LIRC
The Internal 32kHz System Oscillator is one of the low frequency oscillator choices, which is selected
via configuration option. It is a fully integrated RC oscillator with a typical frequency of 32kHz at 5V,
requiring no external components for its implementation. Device trimming during the manufacturing
process and the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the
influence of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency
are minimised. As a result, at a power supply of 5V and at a temperature of 25¢J degrees, the fixed
oscillation frequency of 32kHz will have a tolerance within 10%.
Supplementary Oscillator
The low speed oscillator, in addition to providing a system clock source, is also used to provide a clock
source to two other device functions. These are the Watchdog Timer and the Time Base Interrupts.
Rev. 1.10
29
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Operating Modes and System Clocks
Present day applications require that their microcontrollers have high performance but often still
demand that they consume as little power as possible, conflicting requirements that are especially true
in battery powered portable applications. The fast clocks required for high performance will by their
nature increase current consumption and of course vice versa, lower speed clocks reduce current
consumption. As Holtek has provided these devices with both high and low speed clock sources and
the means to switch between them dynamically, the user can optimise the operation of their
microcontroller to achieve the best performance/power ratio.
System Clocks
The device has many different clock sources for both the CPU and peripheral function operation. By
providing the user with a wide range of clock options using configuration options and register
programming, a clock system can be configured to obtain maximum application performance.
The main system clock can come from a high frequency fH or low frequency fL source and is selected
using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. The high speed system clock can be
sourced from either a HXT, ERC or HIRC oscillator, selected via a configuration option. The low
speed system clock source can be sourced from internal clock fL. If fL is selected, then it can be sourced
by the LIRC oscillator. The other choice, which is a divided version of the high speed system oscillator
has a range of fH/2~fH/64. Note that when the system clock source fSYS is switched to fL from fH, the high
speed oscillation will stop to conserve the power. Thus there is no fH~fH/64 for peripheral circuit to use.
There are two additional internal clocks for the peripheral circuits, the substitute clock, fSUB, and the
Time Base clock, fTBC. These internal clocks are sourced by the LIRC oscillator. The fSUB clock is used
to provide a substitute clock for the microcontroller just after a wake-up has occurred to enable faster
wake-up times. Together with fSYS/4 it is also used as one of the clock sources for the Watchdog timer.
The fTBC clock is used as a source for the Time Base interrupt functions and for the TMs.
System Operation Modes
There are six different modes of operation for the microcontroller, each one with its own special
characteristics and which can be chosen according to the specific performance and power
requirements of the application. There are two modes allowing normal operation of the
microcontroller, the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode. The remaining four modes, the SLEEP0,
SLEEP1, IDLE0 and IDLE1 Mode are used when the microcontroller CPU is switched off to conserve
power.
Description
Operation Mode
CPU
fSYS
fSUB
fS
fTBC
NORMAL Mode
On
fH~ fH/64
On
On
On
SLOW Mode
On
fL
On
On
On
IDLE0 Mode
On
Off
On
On/Off
On
IDLE1 Mode
Off
On
On
On
On
SLEEP0 Mode
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
SLEEP1 Mode
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Rev. 1.10
30
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
NORMAL Mode
As the name suggests this is one of the main operating modes where the microcontroller has all of its
functions operational and where the system clock is provided by one of the high speed oscillators. This
mode operates allowing the microcontroller to operate normally with a clock source will come from
one of the high speed oscillators, either the HXT, ERC or HIRC oscillators. The high speed oscillator
will however first be divided by a ratio ranging from 1 to 64, the actual ratio being selected by the
CKS2~CKS0 and HLCLK bits in the SMOD register. Although a high speed oscillator is used,
running the microcontroller at a divided clock ratio reduces the operating current.
SLOW Mode
This is also a mode where the microcontroller operates normally although now with a slower speed
clock source. The clock source used will be from the low speed oscillator LIRC. Running the
microcontroller in this mode allows it to run with much lower operating currents. In the SLOW Mode,
the fH is off.
SLEEP0 Mode
The SLEEP Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is low. In the SLEEP0 mode the CPU will be stopped, and the fSUB and fS clocks will be
stopped too, and the Watchdog Timer function is disabled. In this mode, the LVDEN is must set to ²0².
If the LVDEN is set to ²1², it won¢t enter the SLEEP0 Mode.
SLEEP1 Mode
The SLEEP Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and the IDLEN bit in the SMOD
register is low. In the SLEEP1 mode the CPU will be stopped. However, the fSUB and fS clocks will
continue to operate if the LVDEN is set to ²1² or the Watchdog Timer function is enabled and if its
clock source is chosen via configuration option to come from the fSUB.
IDLE0 Mode
The IDLE0 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the WDTC register is low. In the IDLE0 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU but some peripheral functions will remain
operational such as the Watchdog Timer and TMs. In the IDLE0 Mode, the system oscillator will be
stopped. In the IDLE0 Mode the Watchdog Timer clock, fS, will either be on or off depending upon the
fS clock source. If the source is fSYS/4, then the fS clock will be off, and if the source comes from fSUB
then fS will be on.
IDLE1 Mode
The IDLE1 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the WDTC register is high. In the IDLE1 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU but may continue to provide a clock source to
keep some peripheral functions operational such as the Watchdog Timer and TMs. In the IDLE1
Mode, the system oscillator will continue to run, and this system oscillator may be high speed or low
speed system oscillator. In the IDLE1 Mode the Watchdog Timer clock, fS, will be on. If the source is
fSYS/4, then the fS clock will be on, and if the source comes from fSUB then fS will be on.
Rev. 1.10
31
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Control Register
A single register, SMOD, is used for overall control of the internal clocks within the device.
SMOD Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
FSTEN
LTO
HTO
IDLEN
HLCLK
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 7~5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Rev. 1.10
CKS2~CKS0: The system clock selection when HLCLK is ²0²
000: fL (fLIRC)
001: fL (fLIRC)
010: fH/64
011: fH/32
100: fH/16
101: fH/8
110: fH/4
111: fH/2
These three bits are used to select which clock is used as the system clock source. In addition to
the system clock source, which is the LIRC, a divided version of the high speed system oscillator
can also be chosen as the system clock source.
FSTEN: Fast Wake-up Control (only for HXT)
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Fast Wake-up Control bit which determines if the fSUB clock source is initially used
after the device wakes up. When the bit is high, the fSUB clock source can be used as a
temporary system clock to provide a faster wake up time as the fSUB clock is available.
LTO: Low speed system oscillator ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the low speed system oscillator ready flag which indicates when the low speed system
oscillator is stable after power on reset or a wake-up has occurred. The flag will be low when in
the SLEEP0 Mode but after a wake-up has occurred, the flag will change to a high level after
1~2 clock cycles as the LIRC oscillator is used.
HTO: High speed system oscillator ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the high speed system oscillator ready flag which indicates when the high speed system
oscillator is stable. This flag is cleared to ²0² by hardware when the device is powered on and
then changes to a high level after the high speed system oscillator is stable. Therefore this flag
will always be read as ²1² by the application program after device power-on. The flag will be low
when in the SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode but after a wake-up has occurred, the flag will change to a
high level after 1024 clock cycles if the HXT oscillator is used and after 15~16 clock cycles if the
ERC or HIRC oscillator is used.
IDLEN: IDLE Mode control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the IDLE Mode Control bit and determines what happens when the HALT instruction is
executed. If this bit is high, when a HALT instruction is executed the device will enter the IDLE
Mode. In the IDLE1 Mode the CPU will stop running but the system clock will continue to keep
the peripheral functions operational as the FSYSON bit is high. If FSYSON bit is low, the CPU
and the system clock will all stop in IDLE0 mode. If the bit is low the device will enter the SLEEP
Mode when a HALT instruction is executed.
32
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Bit 0
HLCLK: system clock selection
0: fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL
1: fH
This bit is used to select if the fH clock or the fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL clock is used as the system clock.
When the bit is high the fH clock will be selected and if low the fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fL clock will be
selected. When system clock switches from the fH clock to the fL clock, the fH clock will be
automatically switched off to conserve power.
Fast Wake-up
To minimise power consumption the device can enter the SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode, where the system
clock source to the device will be stopped. However when the device is woken up again, it can take a
considerable time for the original system oscillator to restart, stabilise and allow normal operation to
resume. To ensure the device is up and running as fast as possible a Fast Wake-up function is provided,
which allows fSUB, namely the LIRC oscillator, to act as a temporary clock to first drive the system until
the original system oscillator has stabilised. As the clock source for the Fast Wake-up function is fSUB,
the Fast Wake-up function is only available in the SLEEP1 and IDLE0 modes. When the device is
woken up from the SLEEP0 mode, the Fast Wake-up function has no effect because the fSUB clock is
stopped. The Fast Wake-up enable/disable function is controlled using the FSTEN bit in the SMOD
register.
If the HXT oscillator is selected as the NORMAL Mode system clock and the Fast Wake-up function is
enabled, then it will take one to two tSUB clock cycles of the LIRC oscillator for the system to wake-up.
The system will then initially run under the fSUB clock source until 1024 HXT clock cycles have
elapsed, at which point the HTO flag will switch high and the system will switch over to operating
from the HXT oscillator.
If the ERC or HIRC oscillators or LIRC oscillator is used as the system oscillator then it will take
15~16 clock cycles of the ERC or HIRC or 1~2 cycles of the LIRC to wake up the system from the
SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode. The Fast Wake-up bit, FSTEN will have no effect in these cases.
System
Oscillator
FSTEN
Bit
Wake-up Time
(SLEEP0 Mode)
0
1024 HXT cycles
1024 HXT cycles
1~2 HXT cycles
1
1024 HXT cycles
1~2 fSUB cycles
(System runs with fSUB first for 1024 HXT cycles
and then switches over to run with the HXT clock)
1~2 HXT cycles
X
15~16 ERC cycles
15~16 ERC cycles
1~2 ERC cycles
HIRC
X
15~16 HIRC cycles
15~16 HIRC cycles
1~2 HIRC cycles
LIRC
X
1~2 LIRC cycles
1~2 LIRC cycles
1~2 LIRC cycles
HXT
ERC
Wake-up Time
(SLEEP1 Mode)
Wake-up Time
(IDLE0 Mode)
Wake-up Time
(IDLE1 Mode)
²X² : don¢t care
Wake-Up Times
Note that if the Watchdog Timer is disabled, which means that the LIRC oscillator is off, then there will be no Fast
Wake-up function available when the device wakes-up from the SLEEP0 Mode.
Rev. 1.10
33
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
fS
ID L E 1
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
C P U s to p
ID L E N = 1
F S Y S O N = 1
fS Y S o n
fT B C o n
fS U B o n
N O R M A L
Y S = f H ~ f H / 6 4
fH o n
C P U ru n
fS Y S o n
fT B C o n
fS U B o n
ID L E 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
C P U s to p
ID L E N = 1
F S Y S O N = 0
fS Y S o ff
fT B C o n
fS U B o n
S L E E P 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
fS Y S o ff
C P U s to p
ID L E N = 0
fT B C o ff
fS U B o ff
W D T & L V D o ff
S L E E P 1
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
fS Y S o ff
C P U s to p
ID L E N = 0
fT B C o ff
fS U B o n
W D T o r L V D o n
S L O W
fS Y S = fL
fL o n
C P U ru n
fS Y S o n
fT B C o n
fS U B o n
fH o ff
Operating Mode Switching
The device can switch between operating modes dynamically allowing the user to select the best
performance/power ratio for the present task in hand. In this way microcontroller operations that do
not require high performance can be executed using slower clocks thus requiring less operating current
and prolonging battery life in portable applications.
In simple terms, Mode Switching between the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode is executed using
the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register while Mode Switching from the
NORMAL/SLOW Modes to the SLEEP/IDLE Modes is executed via the HALT instruction. When a
HALT instruction is executed, whether the device enters the IDLE Mode or the SLEEP Mode is
determined by the condition of the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register and FSYSON in the WDTC
register.
When the HLCLK bit switches to a low level, which implies that clock source is switched from the
high speed clock source, fH, to the clock source, fH/2~fH/64 or fL. If the clock is from the fL, the high
speed clock source will stop running to conserve power. When this happens it must be noted that the
fH/16 and fH/64 internal clock sources will also stop running, which may affect the operation of other
internal functions such as the TMs. The accompanying flowchart shows what happens when the
device moves between the various operating modes.
Rev. 1.10
34
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching
When running in the NORMAL Mode, which uses the high speed system oscillator, and therefore
consumes more power, the system clock can switch to run in the SLOW Mode by set the HLCLK bit to
0 and set the CKS2~CKS0 bits to ²000B² or ²001B² in the SMOD register. This will then use the low
speed system oscillator which will consume less power. Users may decide to do this for certain
operations which do not require high performance and can subsequently reduce power consumption.
The SLOW Mode is sourced from the LIRC oscillator and therefore requires these oscillators to be
stable before full mode switching occurs. This is monitored using the LTO bit in the SMOD register.
N O R M A L M o d e
C K S 2 ~ C K S 0 = 0 0 x B &
H L C L K = 0
S L O W
M o d e
W D T a n d L V D a r e a ll o ff
ID L E N = 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
S L E E P 0 M o d e
W D T o r L V D is o n
ID L E N = 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
S L E E P 1 M o d e
ID L E N = 1 , F S Y S O N = 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
ID E L 0 M o d e
ID L E N = 1 , F S Y S O N = 1
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
ID L E 1 M o d e
Rev. 1.10
35
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching
In SLOW Mode the system uses the LIRC low speed system oscillator. To switch back to the
NORMAL Mode, where the high speed system oscillator is used, the HLCLK bit should be set to ²1²
or HLCLK bit is ²0² but CKS2~CKS0 is set to 010B, 011B, 100B, 101B, 110B or 111B. As a certain
amount of time will be required for the high frequency clock to stabilise, the status of the HTO bit is
checked. The amount of time required for high speed system oscillator stabilization depends upon
which high speed system oscillator type is used.
N O R M A L M o d e
C K S 2 ~ C K S 0 = 0 0 x B &
H L C L K = 0
S L O W
M o d e
W D T a n d L V D a r e a ll o ff
ID L E N = 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
S L E E P 0 M o d e
W D T o r L V D is o n
ID L E N = 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
S L E E P 1 M o d e
ID L E N = 1 , F S Y S O N = 0
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
ID E L 0 M o d e
ID L E N = 1 , F S Y S O N = 1
H A L T in s tr u c tio n is e x e c u te d
ID L E 1 M o d e
Rev. 1.10
36
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Entering the SLEEP0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP0 Mode and that is to execute the HALT
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to 0 and the WDT
and LVD both off. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the
following will occur:
·
The system clock, WDT clock and Time Base clock will be stopped and the application program
will stop at the ²HALT² instruction.
·
The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
·
The WDT will be cleared and stopped no matter if the WDT clock source originates from the fSUB
clock or from the system clock.
·
The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
·
In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the SLEEP1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP1 Mode and that is to execute the ²HALT²
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to ²0² and the WDT
or LVD on. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the following will
occur:
·
The system clock and Time Base clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the
²HALT² instruction, but the WDT or LVD will remain with the clock source coming from the fSUB
clock.
·
The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
·
The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT clock source is selected to come from the
fSUB clock as the WDT is enabled.
·
The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
·
In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE0 Mode and that is to execute the ²HALT²
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to ²1² and the
FSYSON bit in WDTC register equal to ²0². When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
Rev. 1.10
·
The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the ²HALT² instruction,
but the Time Base clock and fSUB clock will be on.
·
The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
·
The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT clock source is selected to come from the
fSUB clock and the WDT is enabled. The WDT will stop if its clock source originates from the system
clock.
·
The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
·
In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
37
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Entering the IDLE1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE1 Mode and that is to execute the HALT
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to ²1² and the
FSYSON bit in the WDTC register equal to ²1². When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
·
The system clock, Time Base clock and fSUB clock will be on and the application program will stop at
the ²HALT² instruction.
·
The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
·
The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT is enabled regardless of the WDT clock
source which originates from the fSUB clock or from the system clock.
·
The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
·
In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Standby Current Considerations
As the main reason for entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode is to keep the current consumption of the
device to as low a value as possible, perhaps only in the order of several micro-amps except in the
IDLE1 Mode, there are other considerations which must also be taken into account by the circuit
designer if the power consumption is to be minimised. Special attention must be made to the I/O pins
on the device. All high-impedance input pins must be connected to either a fixed high or low level as
any floating input pins could create internal oscillations and result in increased current consumption.
This also applies to devices which have different package types, as there may be unbonbed pins. These
must either be setup as outputs or if setup as inputs must have pull-high resistors connected.
Care must also be taken with the loads, which are connected to I/O pins, which are setup as outputs.
These should be placed in a condition in which minimum current is drawn or connected only to
external circuits that do not draw current, such as other CMOS inputs. Also note that additional
standby current will also be required if the LIRC oscillator have been enabled.
In the IDLE1 Mode the system oscillator is on, if the system oscillator is from the high speed system
oscillator, the additional standby current will also be perhaps in the order of several hundred
micro-amps.
Wake-up
After the system enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, it can be woken up from one of various sources
listed as follows:
·
An external reset
·
An external falling edge on Port A
·
A system interrupt
·
A WDT overflow
If the system is woken up by an external reset, the device will experience a full system reset, however, if the device is woken up by a WDT overflow, a Watchdog Timer reset will be initiated. Although both of these wake-up methods will initiate a reset operation, the actual source of the
wake-up can be determined by examining the TO and PDF flags. The PDF flag is cleared by a system power-up or executing the clear Watchdog Timer instructions and is set when executing the
²HALT² instruction. The TO flag is set if a WDT time-out occurs, and causes a wake-up that only resets the Program Counter and Stack Pointer, the other flags remain in their original status.
Rev. 1.10
38
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Each pin on Port A can be setup using the PAWU register to permit a negative transition on the pin to
wake-up the system. When a Port A pin wake-up occurs, the program will resume execution at the
instruction following the ²HALT² instruction. If the system is woken up by an interrupt, then two
possible situations may occur. The first is where the related interrupt is disabled or the interrupt is enabled
but the stack is full, in which case the program will resume execution at the instruction following the
²HALT² instruction. In this situation, the interrupt which woke-up the device will not be immediately
serviced, but will rather be serviced later when the related interrupt is finally enabled or when a stack
level becomes free. The other situation is where the related interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, in
which case the regular interrupt response takes place. If an interrupt request flag is set high before
entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake-up function of the related interrupt will be disabled.
Programming Considerations
If the device is woken up from the SLEEP1 Mode to NORMAL Mode, and the system clock source is
from the HXT oscillator and FSTEN is ²1², the system clock can first be switched to the LIRC
oscillator after wake up.
There are peripheral functions, such as WDT and TMs, for which the fSYS is used. If the system clock
source is switched from fH to fL, the clock source to the peripheral functions mentioned above will
change accordingly.
The on/off condition of fSUB and fS depends upon whether the WDT is enabled or disabled as the WDT
clock source is selected from fSUB.
Watchdog Timer
The Watchdog Timer is provided to prevent program malfunctions or sequences from jumping to
unknown locations, due to certain uncontrollable external events such as electrical noise.
Watchdog Timer Clock Source
The Watchdog Timer clock source is provided by the internal clock, fS, which is in turn supplied by one
of two sources selected by configuration option: fSUB or fSYS/4. The fSUB clock is sourced from the LIRC
oscillator. The LIRC internal oscillator has an approximate period of 32kHz at a supply voltage of 5V.
However, it should be noted that this specified internal clock period can vary with VDD, temperature
and process variations. The other Watchdog Timer clock source option is the fSYS/4 clock. The
Watchdog Timer clock source can originate from the fSUB clock, i.e. its own internal LIRC oscillator or
fSYS/4 determined by a configuration option. The Watchdog Timer source clock is then subdivided by a
ratio of 28 to 215 to give longer timeouts, the actual value being chosen using the WS2~WS0 bits in the
WDTC register.
Rev. 1.10
39
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Watchdog Timer Control Register
A single register, WDTC, controls the required timeout period as well as the enable/disable operation.
This register together with several configuration options control the overall operation of the Watchdog
Timer.
WDTC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
WS2
WS1
WS0
WDTEN3
WDTEN2
WDTEN1
WDTEN0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
Bit 7
Bit 6 ~ 4
Bit 3 ~ 0
FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
0: Disable
1: Enable
WS2, WS1, WS0 : WDT time-out period selection
000: 256/fS
001: 512/fS
010: 1024/fS
011: 2048/fS
100: 4096/fS
101: 8192/fS
110: 16384/fS
111: 32768/fS
WDTEN3, WDTEN2, WDTEN1, WDTEN0 : WDT Software Control
1010: Disable
Other: Enable
Watchdog Timer Operation
The Watchdog Timer operates by providing a device reset when its timer overflows. This means that in
the application program and during normal operation the user has to strategically clear the Watchdog
Timer before it overflows to prevent the Watchdog Timer from executing a reset. This is done using the
clear watchdog instructions. If the program malfunctions for whatever reason, jumps to an unknown
location, or enters an endless loop, these clear instructions will not be executed in the correct manner,
in which case the Watchdog Timer will overflow and reset the device. Some of the Watchdog Timer
options, such as enable/disable, clock source selection and clear instruction type are selected using
configuration options. In addition to a configuration option to enable/disable the Watchdog Timer,
there are also four bits, WDTEN3~WDTEN0, in the WDTC register to offer an additional
enable/disable control of the Watchdog Timer. To disable the Watchdog Timer, as well as the
configuration option being set to disable, the WDTEN3 ~ WDTEN0 bits must also be set to a specific
value of 1010B. Any other values for these bits will keep the Watchdog Timer enabled, irrespective of
the configuration enable/disable setting. After power on these bits will have the value of 1010. If the
Watchdog Timer is used, it is recommended that they are set to a value of 0101B for maximum noise
immunity. Note that if the Watchdog Timer has been disabled, then any instruction relating to its
operation will result in no operation.
WDT Configuration Option
WDTEN3~WDTEN0 Bits
WDT
WDT Enable
xxxx
Enable
WDT Disable
Except 1010
Enable
WDT Disable
1010
Disable
²x²: don¢t care.
Watchdog Timer Enable/Disable Control
Rev. 1.10
40
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Under normal program operation, a Watchdog Timer time-out will initialise a device reset and set the
status bit TO. However, if the system is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, when a Watchdog Timer
time-out occurs, the TO bit in the status register will be set and only the Program Counter and Stack
Pointer will be reset. Three methods can be adopted to clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer. The
first is an external hardware reset, which means a low level on the RES pin, the second is using the
Watchdog Timer software clear instructions and the third is via a HALT instruction.
There are two methods of using software instructions to clear the Watchdog Timer, one of which must
be chosen by configuration option. The first option is to use the single ²CLR WDT² instruction while
the second is to use the two commands ²CLR WDT1² and ²CLR WDT2². For the first option, a simple
execution of ²CLR WDT² will clear the WDT while for the second option, both ²CLR WDT1² and
²CLR WDT2² must both be executed alternately to successfully clear the Watchdog Timer. Note that
for this second option, if ²CLR WDT1² is used to clear the Watchdog Timer, successive executions of
this instruction will have no effect, only the execution of a ²CLR WDT2² instruction will clear the
Watchdog Timer. Similarly after the ²CLR WDT2² instruction has been executed, only a successive
²CLR WDT1² instruction can clear the Watchdog Timer.
The maximum time out period is when the 215division ratio is selected. As an example, with a 32kHz
LIRC oscillator as its source clock, this will give a maximum watchdog period of around 1 second for
the 215 division ratio, and a minimum timeout of 7.8ms for the 28 division ration. If the fSYS/4 clock is
used as the Watchdog Timer clock source, it should be noted that when the system enters the SLEEP or
IDLE0 Mode, then the instruction clock is stopped and the Watchdog Timer may lose its protecting
purposes. For systems that operate in noisy environments, using the fSUB clock source is strongly
recommended.
C L R
C L R
W D T 1 F la g
C le a r W D T T y p e
C o n fig u r a tio n O p tio n
W D T 2 F la g
1 o r 2 In s tr u c tio n s
fS
Y S
/4
fS
U B
M
U
fS
8 - s ta g e D iv id e r
fS /2
8
C L R
W D T P r e s c a le r
X
8 -to -1 M U X
C o n fig u r a tio n
O p tio n
W S 2 ~ W S 0
(fS /2 8 ~ fS /2 15)
W D T T im e - o u t
(2 8 /fS ~ 2 15/fS )
Watchdog Timer
Rev. 1.10
41
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Reset and Initialisation
A reset function is a fundamental part of any microcontroller ensuring that the device can be set to
some predetermined condition irrespective of outside parameters. The most important reset condition
is after power is first applied to the microcontroller. In this case, internal circuitry will ensure that the
microcontroller, after a short delay, will be in a well defined state and ready to execute the first
program instruction. After this power-on reset, certain important internal registers will be set to
defined states before the program commences. One of these registers is the Program Counter, which
will be reset to zero forcing the microcontroller to begin program execution from the lowest Program
Memory address.
In addition to the power-on reset, situations may arise where it is necessary to forcefully apply a reset
condition when the microcontroller is running. One example of this is where after power has been
applied and the microcontroller is already running, the RES line is forcefully pulled low. In such a
case, known as a normal operation reset, some of the microcontroller registers remain unchanged
allowing the microcontroller to precede with normal operation after the reset line is allowed to return
high.
Another type of reset is when the Watchdog Timer overflows and resets the microcontroller. All types
of reset operations result in different register conditions being setup. Another reset exists in the form of
a Low Voltage Reset, LVR, where a full reset, similar to the RES reset is implemented in situations
where the power supply voltage falls below a certain threshold.
Reset Functions
There are five ways in which a microcontroller reset can occur, through events occurring both
internally and externally:
Power-on Reset
The most fundamental and unavoidable reset is the one that occurs after power is first applied to the
microcontroller. As well as ensuring that the Program Memory begins execution from the first
memory address, a power-on reset also ensures that certain other registers are preset to known
conditions. All the I/O port and port control registers will power up in a high condition ensuring that all
pins will be first set to inputs.
V D D
0 .9 V
R E S
D D
t RR
SS TT DD ++
t SS
SS TT
In te rn a l R e s e t
Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms
Power-On Reset Timing Chart
Rev. 1.10
42
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
RES Pin Reset
As the reset pin is shared with PB.3, the reset function must be selected using a configuration option.
Although the microcontroller has an internal RC reset function, if the VDD power supply rise time is
not fast enough or does not stabilise quickly at power-on, the internal reset function may be
incapable of providing proper reset operation. For this reason it is recommended that an external RC
network is connected to the RES pin, whose additional time delay will ensure that the RES pin
remains low for an extended period to allow the power supply to stabilise. During this time delay,
normal operation of the microcontroller will be inhibited. After the RES line reaches a certain
voltage value, the reset delay time tRSTD is invoked to provide an extra delay time after which the
microcontroller will begin normal operation. The abbreviation SST in the figures stands for System
Start-up Timer. For most applications a resistor connected between VDD and the RES pin and a
capacitor connected between VSS and the RES pin will provide a suitable external reset circuit. Any
wiring connected to the RES pin should be kept as short as possible to minimise any stray noise
interference. For applications that operate within an environment where more noise is present the
Enhanced Reset Circuit shown is recommended.
V
0 .0 1 m F * *
D D
V D D
1 N 4 1 4 8 *
1 0 k W ~
1 0 0 k W
P B 3 /R E S
3 0 0 W *
0 .1 ~ 1 m F
V S S
Note:
²*² It is recommended that this component is added for added ESD protection
²**² It is recommended that this component is added in environments where power line noise
is significant
External RES Circuit
More information regarding external reset circuits is located in Application Note HA0075E on the
Holtek website.
Pulling the RES Pin low using external hardware will also execute a device reset. In this case, as in the
case of other resets, the Program Counter will reset to zero and program execution initiated from this
point.
R E S
0 .4 V
0 .9 V
D D
D D
tR
S T D
+
tS
S T
In te rn a l R e s e t
Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms
RES Reset Timing Chart
Rev. 1.10
43
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Low Voltage Reset - LVR
The microcontroller contains a low voltage reset circuit in order to monitor the supply voltage of the
device. The LVR function is selected via a configuration option. If the supply voltage of the device
drops to within a range of 0.9V~VLVR such as might occur when changing the battery, the LVR will
automatically reset the device internally. For a valid LVR signal, a low supply voltage, i.e., a voltage in the
range between 0.9V~VLVR must exist for a time greater than that specified by tLVR in the A.C. characteristics.
If the low supply voltage state does not exceed this value, the LVR will ignore the low supply voltage and
will not perform a reset function. The actual VLVR value can be selected via configuration options.
L V R
tR
S T D
+
tS
S T
In te rn a l R e s e t
Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms
Low Voltage Reset Timing Chart
Watchdog Time-out Reset during Normal Operation
The Watchdog time-out Reset during normal operation is the same as a hardware RES pin reset except
that the Watchdog time-out flag TO will be set to ²1².
W D T T im e - o u t
tR
S T D
+
tS
S T
In te rn a l R e s e t
Note: tRSTD is power-on delay, typical time=100ms
WDT Time-out Reset during Normal Operation Timing Chart
Watchdog Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode
The Watchdog time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode is a little different from other kinds of
reset. Most of the conditions remain unchanged except that the Program Counter and the Stack Pointer
will be cleared to ²0² and the TO flag will be set to ²1². Refer to the A.C. Characteristics for tSST details.
W D T T im e - o u t
tS
S T
In te rn a l R e s e t
Note:
The tSST is 15~16 clock cycles if the system clock source is provided by ERC or HIRC.
The tSST is 1024 clock for HXT. The tSST is 1~2 clock for LIRC.
WDT Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Timing Chart
Rev. 1.10
44
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Reset Initial Conditions
The different types of reset described affect the reset flags in different ways. These flags, known as
PDF and TO are located in the status register and are controlled by various microcontroller operations,
such as the SLEEP or IDLE Mode function or Watchdog Timer. The reset flags are shown in the table:
TO
PDF
RESET Conditions
0
0
Power-on reset
u
u
RES or LVR reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation
1
u
WDT time-out reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation
1
1
WDT time-out reset during IDLE or SLEEP Mode operation
Note: ²u² stands for unchanged
The following table indicates the way in which the various components of the microcontroller are affected after a power-on reset occurs.
Item
Condition After RESET
Program Counter
Reset to zero
Interrupts
All interrupts will be disabled
WDT
Clear after reset, WDT begins counting
Timer/Event Counter
Timer Counter will be turned off
Input/Output Ports
I/O ports will be setup as inputs
Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack
The different kinds of resets all affect the internal registers of the microcontroller in different ways.
To ensure reliable continuation of normal program execution after a reset occurs, it is important to
know what condition the microcontroller is in after a particular reset occurs. The following table describes how each type of reset affects each of the microcontroller internal registers.
HT68F13 Register
Reset
(Power-on)
RES or LVR
Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(IDLE)
MP0
1xxx xxxx
1xxx xxxx
1xxx xxxx
1uuu uuuu
MP1
1xxx xxxx
1xxx xxxx
1xxx xxxx
1uuu uuuu
ACC
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PCL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
TBLP
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBHP
---- --xx
---- --uu
---- --uu
---- --uu
TBLH
--xx xxxx
--uu uuuu
--uu uuuu
--uu uuuu
STATUS
--00 xxxx
--uu uuuu
--1u uuuu
--11 uuuu
SMOD
0000 0011
0000 0011
0000 0011
uuuu uuuu
LVDC
--00 -000
--00 -000
--00 -000
--uu -uuu
INTEG
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
WDTC
0111 1010
0111 1010
0111 1010
uuuu uuuu
TBC
0011 ----
0011 ----
0011 ----
uuuu ----
Register
Rev. 1.10
45
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Reset
(Power-on)
RES or LVR
Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(IDLE)
INTC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
INTC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PAWU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PAPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PA
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PAC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PB
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PCPU
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PC
---- --11
---- --11
---- --11
---- --uu
PCC
---- --11
---- --11
---- --11
---- --uu
TMPC
--01 ----
--01 ----
--01 ----
--uu ----
TM1C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
SCOMC
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Register
Note:
²u² stands for unchanged
²x² stands for unknown
²-² stands for unimplemented
Rev. 1.10
46
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
HT68F14 Register
Reset
(Power-on)
RES or LVR
Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(IDLE)
MP0
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
MP1
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
ACC
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PCL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
TBLP
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBLH
-xxx xxxx
-uuu uuuu
-uuu uuuu
-uuu uuuu
TBHP
---- -xxx
---- -uuu
---- -uuu
---- -uuu
STATUS
--00 xxxx
--uu uuuu
--1u uuuu
--11 uuuu
SMOD
0000 0011
0000 0011
0000 0011
uuuu uuuu
LVDC
--00 -000
--00 -000
--00 -000
--uu -uuu
INTEG
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
WDTC
0111 1010
0111 1010
0111 1010
uuuu uuuu
TBC
0011 ----
0011 ----
0011 ----
uuuu ----
INTC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
INTC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFI0
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI1
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
PAWU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PAPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PA
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
Register
PAC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PB
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PCPU
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
PC
---- 1111
---- 1111
---- 1111
---- uuuu
PCC
---- 1111
---- 1111
---- 1111
---- uuuu
PDPU
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PD
---- --11
---- --11
---- --11
---- --uu
PDC
---- --11
---- --11
---- --11
---- --uu
TMPC
--01 --01
--01 --01
--01 --01
--uu --uu
TM0C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM0AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Rev. 1.10
47
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Reset
(Power-on)
RES or LVR
Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(IDLE)
TM0AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
SCOMC
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Register
Note:
²u² stands for unchanged
²x² stands for unknown
²-² stands for unimplemented
Rev. 1.10
48
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
HT68F15 Register
Reset
(Power-on)
RES or LVR
Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(IDLE)
MP0
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
MP1
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
ACC
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PCL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
TBLP
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBLH
-xxx xxxx
-uuu uuuu
-uuu uuuu
-uuu uuuu
TBHP
---- xxxx
---- uuuu
---- uuuu
---- uuuu
STATUS
--00 xxxx
--uu uuuu
--1u uuuu
--11 uuuu
SMOD
0000 0011
0000 0011
0000 0011
uuuu uuuu
LVDC
--00 -000
--00 -000
--00 -000
--uu -uuu
INTEG
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
WDTC
0111 1010
0111 1010
0111 1010
uuuu uuuu
TBC
0011 ----
0011 ----
0011 ----
uuuu ----
INTC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
INTC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFI0
--00 --00
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI1
-000 -000
-000 -000
-000 -000
-uuu -uuu
PAWU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PAPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PA
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
Register
PAC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PB
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PCPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PCC
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PDPU
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PD
---- --11
---- --11
---- --11
---- --uu
PDC
---- --11
---- --11
---- --11
---- --uu
TMPC
1001 --01
1001 --01
1001 --01
uuuu --uu
TM0C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM0DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM0AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Rev. 1.10
49
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Reset
(Power-on)
RES or LVR
Reset
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(IDLE)
TM0AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1C0
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1C2
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
TM1BL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TM1BH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
SCOMC
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Register
Note:
²u² stands for unchanged
²x² stands for unknown
²-² stands for unimplemented
Rev. 1.10
50
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Input/Output Ports
Holtek microcontrollers offer considerable flexibility on their I/O ports. With the input or output
designation of every pin fully under user program control, pull-high selections for all ports and
wake-up selections on certain pins, the user is provided with an I/O structure to meet the needs of a
wide range of application possibilities.
The device provides bidirectional input/output lines labeled with port names PA~PD. These I/O ports
are mapped to the RAM Data Memory with specific addresses as shown in the Special Purpose Data
Memory table. All of these I/O ports can be used for input and output operations. For input operation,
these ports are non-latching, which means the inputs must be ready at the T2 rising edge of instruction
²MOV A,[m]², where m denotes the port address. For output operation, all the data is latched and
remains unchanged until the output latch is rewritten.
I/O Register List
HT68F13
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PAWU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PB
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCPU
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
PC
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
PCC
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
HT68F14
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PAWU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PB
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCPU
¾
¾
¾
¾
D3
D2
D1
D0
PC
¾
¾
¾
¾
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCC
¾
¾
¾
¾
D3
D2
D1
D0
PDPU
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
PD
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
PDC
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
Rev. 1.10
51
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
HT68F15
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PAWU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PAC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PB
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PBC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCPU
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PCC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PDPU
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
PD
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
PDC
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
D a ta B u s
W r ite C o n tr o l R e g is te r
C o n tr o l B it
Q
D
W r ite D a ta R e g is te r
R e a d D a ta R e g is te r
S y s te m
V
D D
W e a k
P u ll- u p
Q
C K
S
C h ip R e s e t
R e a d C o n tr o l R e g is te r
P u ll- H ig h
R e g is te r
S e le c t
I/O
D a ta B it
Q
D
C K
S
p in
Q
M
U
X
W a k e -u p
W a k e - u p S e le c t
P A o n ly
Generic Input/Output Structure
Rev. 1.10
52
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Pull-high Resistors
Many product applications require pull-high resistors for their switch inputs usually requiring the use
of an external resistor. To eliminate the need for these external resistors, all I/O pins, when configured
as an input have the capability of being connected to an internal pull-high resistor. These pull-high
resistors are selected using registers PAPU~PDPU and are implemented using weak PMOS
transistors.
PAPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
I/O Port A bit 7 ~ bit 0 pull-high control
0: disable
1: enable
PBPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
I/O Port B bit 7 ~ bit 0 pull-high control
0: disable
1: enable
PCPU Register - HT68F13
Bit
7
6
5
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
3
2
1
0
²¾² Unimplemented, read as ²0²
I/O Port C bit 1 ~ bit 0 pull-high control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
PCPU Register - HT68F14
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~4
Bit 3~0
Rev. 1.10
²¾² Unimplemented, read as ²0²
I/O Port C bit 3 ~ bit 0 pull-high control
0: disable
1: enable
53
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
PCPU Register - HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7~0
I/O Port C bit 7 ~ bit 0 pull-high control
0: disable
1: enable
PDPU Register - HT68F14, HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
²¾² Unimplemented, read as ²0²
I/O Port D bit 1 ~ bit 0 pull-high control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
Port A Wake-up
The HALT instruction forces the microcontroller into the SLEEP or IDLE Mode which preserves
power, a feature that is important for battery and other low-power applications. Various methods exist
to wake-up the microcontroller, one of which is to change the logic condition on one of the Port A pins
from high to low. This function is especially suitable for applications that can be woken up via external
switches. Each pin on Port A can be selected individually to have this wake-up feature using the
PAWU register.
PAWU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
PAWU: Port A bit 7 ~ bit 0 wake-up control
0: disable
1: enable
I/O Port Control Registers
Each I/O port has its own control register known as PAC~PDC, to control the input/output
configuration. With this control register, each CMOS output or input can be reconfigured dynamically
under software control. Each pin of the I/O ports is directly mapped to a bit in its associated port
control register. For the I/O pin to function as an input, the corresponding bit of the control register
must be written as 1. This will then allow the logic state of the input pin to be directly read by
instructions. When the corresponding bit of the control register is written as 0, the I/O pin will be setup
as a CMOS output. If the pin is currently setup as an output, instructions can still be used to read the
output register. However, it should be noted that the program will in fact only read the status of the
output data latch and not the actual logic status of the output pin.
Rev. 1.10
54
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
PAC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~0
I/O Port A bit 7 ~ bit 0 input/output control
0: output
1: input
PBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~0
I/O Port B bit 7 ~ bit 0 input/output control
0: output
1: input
PCC Register - HT68F13
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
1
1
3
2
1
0
²¾² Unimplemented, read as ²0²
I/O Port C bit 1 ~ bit 0 input/output control
0: output
1: input
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
PCC Register - HT68F14
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
0
²¾² Unimplemented, read as ²0²
I/O Port C bit 3 ~ bit 0 input/output control
0: output
1: input
Bit 7~4
Bit 3~0
PCC Register - HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.10
I/O Port C bit 7 ~ bit 0 input/output control
0: output
1: input
55
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
PDC Register - HT68F14, HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D1
D0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
²¾² Unimplemented, read as ²0²
I/O Port D bit 1 ~ bit 0 input/output control
0: output
1: input
I/O Pin Structures
The accompanying diagrams illustrate the internal structures of some generic I/O pin types. As the
exact logical construction of the I/O pin will differ from these drawings, they are supplied as a guide
only to assist with the functional understanding of the I/O pins. The wide range of pin-shared
structures does not permit all types to be shown. The diagrams illustrate the I/O pin internal structures.
As the exact logical construction of the I/O pin may differ from these drawings, they are supplied as a
guide only to assist with the functional understanding of the I/O pins.
Programming Considerations
Within the user program, one of the first things to consider is port initialisation. After a reset, all of the
I/O data and port control registers will be set high. This means that all I/O pins will default to an input
state, the level of which depends on the other connected circuitry and whether pull-high selections
have been chosen. If the port control registers, PAC~PDC, are then programmed to setup some pins as
outputs, these output pins will have an initial high output value unless the associated port data
registers, PA~PD, are first programmed. Selecting which pins are inputs and which are outputs can be
achieved byte-wide by loading the correct values into the appropriate port control register or by
programming individual bits in the port control register using the ²SET [m].i² and ²CLR [m].i²
instructions. Note that when using these bit control instructions, a read-modify-write operation takes
place. The microcontroller must first read in the data on the entire port, modify it to the required new
bit values and then rewrite this data back to the output ports.
Port A has the additional capability of providing wake-up functions. When the device is in the SLEEP
or IDLE Mode, various methods are available to wake the device up. One of these is a high to low
transition of any of the Port A pins. Single or multiple pins on Port A can be setup to have this function.
Rev. 1.10
56
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Timer Modules - TM
One of the most fundamental functions in any microcontroller device is the ability to control and
measure time. To implement time related functions each device includes several Timer Modules,
abbreviated to the name TM. The TMs are multi-purpose timing units and serve to provide operations
such as Timer/Counter, Input Capture, Compare Match Output and Single Pulse Output as well as
being the functional unit for the generation of PWM signals. Each of the TMs has either two or three
individual interrupts. The addition of input and output pins for each TM ensures that users are provided
with timing units with a wide and flexible range of features.
The common features of the different TM types are described here with more detailed information
provided in the individual Compact, Standard and Enhanced TM sections.
Introduction
The devices contain up to two TMs with each TM having a reference name of TM0 and TM1. Each
individual TM can be categorised as a certain type, namely Compact Type TM (CTM), Standard Type
TM (STM) or Enhanced Type TM (ETM). Although similar in nature, the different TM types vary in
their feature complexity. The common features to all of the Compact, Standard and Enhanced TMs
will be described in this section and the detailed operation regarding each of the TM types will be
described in separate sections. The main features and differences between the three types of TMs are
summarised in the accompanying table.
Function
CTM
STM
ETM
Timer/Counter
Ö
Ö
Ö
I/P Capture
¾
Ö
Ö
Compare Match Output
Ö
Ö
Ö
PWM Channels
1
1
2
Single Pulse Output
¾
1
2
Edge
Edge
Edge & Centre
Duty or Period
Duty or Period
Duty or Period
PWM Alignment
PWM Adjustment Period & Duty
TM Function Summary
Each device in the series contains a specific number of either Compact Type, Standard Type and Enhanced Type TM units which are shown in the table together with their individual reference name,
TM0~TM1.
Device
TM0
TM1
HT68F13
¾
10-bit STM
HT68F14
10-bit CTM
10-bit STM
HT68F15
10-bit CTM
10-bit ETM
TM Name/Type Reference
Rev. 1.10
57
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TM Operation
The three different types of TM offer a diverse range of functions, from simple timing operations to
PWM signal generation. The key to understanding how the TM operates is to see it in terms of a free
running counter whose value is then compared with the value of pre-programmed internal
comparators. When the free running counter has the same value as the pre-programmed comparator,
known as a compare match situation, a TM interrupt signal will be generated which can clear the
counter and perhaps also change the condition of the TM output pin. The internal TM counter is driven
by a user selectable clock source, which can be an internal clock or an external pin.
TM Clock Source
The clock source which drives the main counter in each TM can originate from various sources. The
selection of the required clock source is implemented using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in the TM control
registers. The clock source can be a ratio of either the system clock fSYS or the high speed clock fH, the
fTBC clock source or the external TCKn pin. Note that setting these bits to the value 101 will select a
reserved clock input, in effect disconnecting the TM clock source. The TCKn pin clock source is used
to allow an external signal to drive the TM as an external clock source or for event counting.
TM Interrupts
The Compact and Standard type TMs each have two internal interrupts, one for each of the internal
comparator A or comparator P, which generate a TM interrupt when a compare match condition
occurs. As the Enhanced type TM has three internal comparators and comparator A or comparator B or
comparator P compare match functions, it consequently has three internal interrupts. When a TM
interrupt is generated it can be used to clear the counter and also to change the state of the TM output
pin.
TM External Pins
Each of the TMs, irrespective of what type, has one TM input pin, with the label TCKn. The TM input
pin, is essentially a clock source for the TM and is selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits in the
TMnC0 register. This external TM input pin allows an external clock source to drive the internal TM.
This external TM input pin is shared with other functions but will be connected to the internal TM if
selected using the TnCK2~TnCK0 bits. The TM input pin can be chosen to have either a rising or
falling active edge.
The TMs each have one or more output pins with the label TPn. When the TM is in the Compare
Match Output Mode, these pins can be controlled by the TM to switch to a high or low level or to
toggle when a compare match situation occurs. The external TPn output pin is also the pin where the
TM generates the PWM output waveform. As the TM output pins are pin-shared with other function,
the TM output function must first be setup using registers. A single bit in one of the registers
determines if its associated pin is to be used as an external TM output pin or if it is to have another
function. The number of output pins for each TM type and device is different, the details are provided
in the accompanying table.
Rev. 1.10
58
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
All TM output pin names have an ²_n² suffix. Pin names that include a ²_1² or ²_2² suffix indicate that
they are from a TM with multiple output pins. This allows the TM to generate a complimentary output
pair, selected using the I/O register data bits.
Device
CTM
STM
ETM
Registers
HT68F13
¾
TP1_0, TP1_1
¾
TMPC
HT68F14
TP0_0, TP0_1
TP1_0, TP1_1
¾
TMPC
HT68F15
TP0_0, TP0_1
¾
TP1A, TP1B_0,
TP1B_1, TP1B_2
TMPC
TM Output Pins
TM Input/Output Pin Control Registers
Selecting to have a TM input/output or whether to retain its other shared function is implemented using
one register, with a single bit in each register corresponding to a TM input/output pin. Setting the bit
high will setup the corresponding pin as a TM input/output, if reset to zero the pin will retain its
original other function.
TMPC Register
Bit
Device
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
HT68F13
¾
¾
T1CP1
T1CP0
¾
¾
¾
¾
HT68F14
¾
¾
T1CP1
T1CP0
¾
¾
T0CP1
T0CP0
HT68F15
T1ACP0
T1BCP2
T1BCP1
T1BCP0
¾
¾
T0CP1
T0CP0
TM Input/Output Pin Control Registers List
Rev. 1.10
59
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
P A 7 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
1
0
1
T 1 C P 0
P A 7
P B 6 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
0
1
0
1
P B 6 /T P 1 _ 1
T 1 C P 1
P B 6
1
C a p tu re In p u t
0
T M 1
(S T M )
T 1 C P 1
1
0
T 1 C P 0
T C K In p u t
P A 6 /T C K 1
HT68F13 TM Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note:
1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one TM input.
Rev. 1.10
60
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
0
P A 5 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
1
0
1
T 0 C P 0
P A 5
0
P C 1 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
1
0
1
T M 0
(C T M )
T C K In p u t
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1
T 0 C P 1
P C 1
P A 4 /T C K 0
P A 7 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P A 7 /T P 1 _ 0
1
0
1
T 1 C P 0
P A 7
P B 6 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
0
1
0
1
P B 6 /T P 1 _ 1
T 1 C P 1
P B 6
1
C a p tu re In p u t
0
T M 1
(S T M )
T 1 C P 1
1
0
T 1 C P 0
T C K In p u t
P A 6 /T C K 1
HT68F14 TM0 & TM1 Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note:
1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one TM input.
Rev. 1.10
61
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
0
P A 5 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
P A 5 /T P 0 _ 0
1
0
1
T 0 C P 0
P A 5
0
P C 1 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
O u tp u t
1
T M 0
(C T M )
T C K In p u t
P C 1 /T P 0 _ 1
1
0
T 0 C P 1
P C 1
P A 4 /T C K 0
0
P C 0 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
1
C C R A O u tp u t
P C 0 /T P 1 A
T 1 A C P 0
1
C C R A C a p tu re In p u t
0
T 1 A C P 0
P A 7 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P A 7 /T P 1 B _ 0
1
0
1
T 1 B C P 0
P A 7
P B 6 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
0
P B 6 /T P 1 B _ 1
1
0
1
T M 1
(E T M )
T 1 B C P 1
P B 6
P B 7 O u tp u t F u n c tio n
C C R B O u tp u t
0
1
0
1
P B 7 /T P 1 B _ 2
T 1 B C P 2
P B 7
1
C C R B C a p tu re In p u t
0
T 1 B C P 2
1
0
T 1 B C P 1
1
0
T 1 B C P 0
T C K In p u t
P A 6 /T C K 1
HT68F15 TM0 & TM1 Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Note:
1. The I/O register data bits shown are used for TM output inversion control.
2. In the Capture Input Mode, the TM pin control register must never enable more than one TM input.
Rev. 1.10
62
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TMPC Register - HT68F13
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
T1CP1
T1CP0
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
POR
¾
¾
0
1
¾
¾
¾
¾
3
2
1
0
Bit 7, 6
Bit 5
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1CP1: TP1_1 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 4
T1CP0: TP1_0 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 3~0
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TMPC Register - HT68F14
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
¾
¾
T1CP1
T1CP0
¾
¾
T0CP1
T0CP0
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
0
1
¾
¾
0
1
Bit 7~6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3~2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1CP1: TP1_1 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
T1CP0: TP1_0 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
T0CP1: TP0_1 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
T0CP0: TP0_0 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
63
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TMPC Register - HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T1ACP0
T1BCP2
T1BCP1
T1BCP0
¾
¾
T0CP1
T0CP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
1
0
0
1
¾
¾
0
1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
T1ACP0: TP1A pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
T1BCP2: TP1B_2 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
T1BCP1: TP1B_1 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 4
T1BCP0: TP1B_0 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 3~2
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
Bit 1
T0CP1: TP0_1 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
T0CP0: TP0_0 pin enable control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 0
Programming Considerations
The TM Counter Registers and the Capture/Compare CCRA and CCRB registers, being either 10-bit
or 16-bit, all have a low and high byte structure. The high bytes can be directly accessed, but as the low
bytes can only be accessed via an internal 8-bit buffer, reading or writing to these register pairs must be
carried out in a specific way. The important point to note is that data transfer to and from the 8-bit
buffer and its related low byte only takes place when a write or read operation to its corresponding high
byte is executed.
TM Counter Register (Read only)
TMxDL
TMxDH
8-bit
Buffer
TMxAL
TMxAH
TM CCRA Register (Read/Write)
TMxBL
TMxBH
TM CCRB Register (Read/Write)
Data
Bus
As the CCRA and CCRB registers are implemented in the way shown in the following diagram and
accessing these register pairs is carried out in a specific way as described above, it is recommended to
use the ²MOV² instruction to access the CCRA and CCRB low byte registers, named TMxAL and
TMxBL, using the following access procedures. Accessing the CCRA or CCRB low byte registers
without following these access procedures will result in unpredictable values.
Rev. 1.10
64
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
The following steps show the read and write procedures:
·
Writing Data to CCRB or CCRA
¨ Step 1. Write data to Low Byte TMxAL or TMxBL - note that here data is only written to the 8-bit
buffer.
¨ Step 2. Write data to High Byte TMxAH or TMxBH - here data is written directly to the high byte
registers and simultaneously data is latched from the 8-bit buffer to the Low Byte registers.
·
Reading Data from the Counter Registers and CCRB or CCRA
1. Read data from the High Byte TMxDH, TMxAH or TMxBH - here data is read directly
from the High Byte registers and simultaneously data is latched from the Low Byte register into
the 8-bit buffer.
¨ Step
¨ Step 2. Read data from the Low Byte TMxDL, TMxAL or TMxBL - this step reads data from the
8-bit buffer.
Compact Type TM - CTM
Although the simplest form of the three TM types, the Compact TM type still contains three operating
modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/Event Counter and PWM Output modes. The
Compact TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive one or two external output
pins. These two external output pins can be the same signal or the inverse signal.
CTM
Name
TM No.
TM Input Pin
TM Output Pin
HT68F13
¾
¾
¾
¾
HT68F14, HT68F15
10-bit CTM
0
TCK0
TP0_0, TP0_1
Compact TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock
source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator P.
These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The CCRP
is three bits wide whose value is compared with the highest three bits in the counter while the CCRA is
the ten bits and therefore compares with all counter bits.
C C R P
3 - b it C o m p a r a to r P
fS
Y S
/4
fS
Y S
fH /1 6
fH /6 4
fT B C
R e s e rv e d
T C K n
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
C o m p a ra to r P M a tc h
T n P F In te rru p t
b 7 ~ b 9
1 0 - b it C o u n t- u p C o u n te r
T n O C
C o u n te r C le a r
0
1
1 1 1
T n O N
b 0 ~ b 9
O u tp u t
C o n tro l
T n M 1 , T n M 0
T n IO 1 , T n IO 0
T n C C L R
P o la r ity
C o n tro l
T P n P in
O u tp u t
T P n _ 0
T P n _ 1
T n P O L
T n P A U
1 0 - b it C o m p a r a to r A
C o m p a ra to r A
M a tc h
T n A F In te rru p t
T n C K 2 ~ T n C K 0
C C R A
Compact Type TM Block Diagram
Rev. 1.10
65
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to clear the
counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared automatically by
a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators. When these conditions
occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Compact Type TM can operate in a
number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock sources including an input pin
and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant internal
registers.
Compact Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Compact TM is controlled using six registers. A read only register pair exists
to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store the internal
10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the different
operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits.
CTM Register List - HT68F14/HT68F15
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TM0C0
T0PAU
T0CK2
T0CK1
T0CK0
T0ON
T0RP2
T0RP1
T0RP0
TM0C1
T0M1
T0M0
T0IO1
T0IO0
T0OC
T0POL
T0DPX
T0CCLR
TM0DL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM0DH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
TM0AL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM0AH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
10-bit Compact TM Register List
TM0DL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
TM0DL: TM0 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0DH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R
R
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
Rev. 1.10
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TM0DH: TM0 Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TM0 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8
66
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TM0AL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Bit 7~0
TM0AL: TM0 CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
TM0AH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TM0AH: TM0 CCRA High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
TM0 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
TM0C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T0PAU
T0CK2
T0CK1
T0CK0
T0ON
T0RP2
T0RP1
T0RP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6~4
Bit 3
Rev. 1.10
T0PAU: TM0 Counter Pause Control
0: run
1: pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores normal
counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up and continue to
consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit changes from low to high
and resume counting from this value when the bit changes to a low value again.
T0CK2~T0CK0: Select TM0 Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: undefined
110: TCKn rising edge clock
111: TCKn falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved clock
input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source can be chosen to
be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the system clock, while fH and
fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be found in the oscillator section.
T0ON: TM0 Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the counter to
run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the counter from counting
and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption. When the bit changes state from
low to high the internal counter value will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from
high to low, the internal counter will retain its residual value.
If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset to its initial
condition, as specified by the T0OC bit, when the T0ON bit changes from low to high.
67
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Bit 2~0
T0RP2~T0RP0: TM0 CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the TM0 Counter bit 9~bit 7
Comparator P Match Period
000: 1024 TM0 clocks
001: 128 TM0 clocks
010: 256 TM0 clocks
011: 384 TM0 clocks
100: 512 TM0 clocks
101: 640 TM0 clocks
110: 768 TM0 clocks
111: 896 TM0 clocks
These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which are then
compared with the internal counter's highest three bits. The result of this comparison can be
selected to clear the internal counter if the T0CCLR bit is set to zero. Setting the T0CCLR bit to
zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values will reset the internal counter. As the
CCRP bits are only compared with the highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128
clock cycle multiples. Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at
its maximum value.
TM0C1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T0M1
T0M0
T0IO1
T0IO0
T0OC
T0POL
T0DPX
T0CCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Bit 5~4
Rev. 1.10
T0M1~T0M0: Select TM0 Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Undefined
10: PWM Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM
should be switched off before any changes are made to the T0M1 and T0M0 bits. In the
Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
T0IO1~T0IO0: Select TP0_0, TP0_1 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode
00: PWM output inactive state
01: PWM output active state
10: PWM output
11: Undefined
Timer/counter Mode
unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain
condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is
running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits determine how the TM output
pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output pin can
be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match occurs
from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the
output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T0OC bit in the TM0C1
register. Note that the output level requested by the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits must be different from
the initial value setup using the T0OC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin
when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial
level by changing the level of the T0ON bit from low to high.
68
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Bit 3
In the PWM Mode, the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state
when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by
changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T0IO1 and T0IO0 bits only
after the TMn has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T0IO1 and
T0IO0 bits are changed when the TM is running
T0OC: TP0_0, TP0_1 output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is
being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode. It has no effect if the TM is
in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of
the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Mode it determines if the PWM
signal is active high or active low.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
T0POL: TP0_0, TP0_1 output polarity control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TP0_0 or TP0_1 output pin. When the bit is set high the TM
output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the
Timer/Counter Mode.
T0DPX: TM0 PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and duty
control of the PWM waveform.
T0CCLR: Select TM0 Counter clear condition
0: TM0 Comparatror P match
1: TM0 Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the Compact TM
contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of which can be selected to
clear the internal counter. With the T0CCLR bit set high, the counter will be cleared when a
compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared
when a compare match occurs from the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter
overflow clearing method can only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero.
The T0CCLR bit is not used in the PWM Mode.
69
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Compact Type TM Operating Modes
The Compact Type TM can operate in one of three operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating mode is selected using the TnM1 and TnM0 bits
in the TMnC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register, should be set to 00B respectively. In
this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are a
counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when a
compare match occurs from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows
the counter to overflow. Here both TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags for the Comparator A and
Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. If the CCRA bits are all zero, the
counter will overflow when its reaches its maximum 10-bit, 3FF Hex, value, however here the TnAF
interrupt request flag will not be generated.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin will change state.
The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a TnAF interrupt request flag is
generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The TnPF interrupt request flag,
generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output pin.
The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the TnIO1 and
TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits
to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from
Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes
from low to high, is setup using the TnOC bit. Note that if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are zero then no
pin change will take place.
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 11 respectively. The
Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode generating the
same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output pin is not used.
Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match Output Mode can be
used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode, the pin can be used as a
normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively. The
PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control,
heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty
cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent
DC RMS values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit has no effect on the PWM
operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one
register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the
other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency or duty
cycle is determined using the TnDPX bit in the TMnC1 register. The PWM waveform frequency and
duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
Rev. 1.10
70
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
Counter overflow
CCRP=0
0x3FF
TnCCLR = 0; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
Stop
CCRA
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Output not affected by TnAF
flag. Remains High until reset
by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 0
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=0, a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.10
71
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
No TnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TnPF not
generated
Output does
not change
TM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Output not affected by
TnAF flag. Remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 1
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=1, a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1
Rev. 1.10
72
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnPOL bit is
used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
·
CTM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
000b
Period
128
256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b and CCRA =128,
The CTM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125 kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
·
CCRP
CTM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=1
001b
010b
011b
100b
Period
Duty
101b
110b
111b
000b
640
768
896
1024
CCRA
128
256
384
512
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock while
the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value.
Counter Value
TnDPX = 0; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Reset when
TnON returns high
CCRP
Pause Resume
Counter Stop if
TnON bit low
CCRA
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
PWM Period
set by CCRP
PWM resumes
operation
Output controlled by
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode -- TnDPX = 0
Note:
1. Here TnDPX=0 -- Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.10
73
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnDPX = 1; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
by CCRA
Counter Reset when
TnON returns high
CCRA
Pause Resume
Counter Stop if
TnON bit low
CCRP
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRP
PWM Period
set by CCRA
PWM resumes
operation
Output controlled by
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode -- TnDPX = 1
Note:
1. Here TnDPX = 1 -- Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.10
74
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Standard Type TM - STM
The Standard Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output,
Timer/Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Standard TM
can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive one or two external output pins.
CTM
Name
TM No.
TM Input Pin
TM Output Pin
HT68F13/HT68F14
10-bit STM
1
TCK1
TP1_0, TP1_1
HT68F15
¾
¾
¾
¾
Standard TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock
source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator P.
These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The CCRP
is three bits wide whose value is compared with the highest three bits in the counter while the CCRA is
the ten bits and therefore compares with all counter bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to clear the
counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared automatically by
a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators. When these conditions
occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Standard Type TM can operate in a
number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock sources including an input pin
and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant internal
registers.
C C R P
3 - b it C o m p a r a to r P
fS
Y S
/4
fS
Y S
fH /1 6
fH /6 4
fT B C
R e s e rv e d
T C K n
T n P F In te rru p t
b 7 ~ b 9
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
C o m p a ra to r P M a tc h
1 0 - b it C o u n t- u p C o u n te r
b 0 ~ b 9
T n O N
T n P A U
1 0 - b it C o m p a r a to r A
T n O C
0
C o u n te r C le a r
1
T n C C L R
C o m p a ra to r A
M a tc h
O u tp u t
C o n tro l
P o la r ity
C o n tro l
T n M 1 , T n M 0
T n IO 1 , T n IO 0
T n P O L
T P n P in
In p u t/O u tp u t
T P n _ 0
T P n _ 1
T n A F In te rru p t
T n IO 1 , T n IO 0
T n C K 2 ~ T n C K 0
C C R A
E d g e
D e te c to r
Standard Type TM Block Diagram
Rev. 1.10
75
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Standard Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Standard TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only register pair
exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store the
internal 10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the different
operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits.
STM Register List - HT68F13/ HT68F14
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TM1C0
T1PAU
T1CK2
T1CK1
T1CK0
T1ON
T1RP2
T1RP1
T1RP0
TM1C1
T1M1
T1M0
T1IO1
T1IO0
T1OC
T1POL
T1DPX
T1CCLR
TM1DL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM1DH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
TM1AL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM1AH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
10-bit Standard TM Register List
TM1C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T1PAU
T1CK2
T1CK1
T1CK0
T1ON
T1RP2
T1RP1
T1RP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6~4
Bit 3
Rev. 1.10
T1PAU: TM1 Counter Pause Control
0: run
1: pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores normal
counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up and continue to
consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit changes from low to high
and resume counting from this value when the bit changes to a low value again.
T1CK2~T1CK0: Select TM1 Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: undefined
110: TCK1 rising edge clock
111: TCK1 falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved clock
input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source can be chosen to
be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the system clock, while fH and
fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be found in the oscillator section.
T1ON: TM1 Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the counter to
run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the counter from counting
and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption. When the bit changes state from
low to high the internal counter value will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from
high to low, the internal counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again.
If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset to its initial
condition, as specified by the T1OC bit, when the T1ON bit changes from low to high.
76
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Bit 2~0
T1RP2~T1RP0: TM1 CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the TM1 Counter bit 9~bit 7
Comparator P Match Period
000: 1024 TM1 clocks
001: 128 TM1 clocks
010: 256 TM1 clocks
011: 384 TM1 clocks
100: 512 TM1 clocks
101: 640 TM1 clocks
110: 768 TM1 clocks
111: 896 TM1 clocks
These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which are then
compared with the internal counter's highest three bits. The result of this comparison can be
selected to clear the internal counter if the T1CCLR bit is set to zero. Setting the T1CCLR bit to
zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values will reset the internal counter. As the
CCRP bits are only compared with the highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128
clock cycle multiples. Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at
its maximum value.
TM1C1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T1M1
T1M0
T1IO1
T1IO0
T1OC
T1POL
T1DPX
T1CCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Bit 5~4
Rev. 1.10
T1M1~T1M0: Select TM1 Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM
should be switched off before any changes are made to the T1M1 and T1M0 bits. In the
Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
T1IO1~T1IO0: Select TP1_0, TP1_1 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM output inactive state
01: PWM output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of TP1_0, TP1_1
01: Input capture at falling edge of TP1_0, TP1_1
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP1_0, TP1_1
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/counter Mode:
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain
condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is
running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T1IO1 and T1IO0 bits determine how the TM output
pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output pin can
be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match occurs
from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the
output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T1OC bit in the TM1C1
register. Note that the output level requested by the T1IO1 and T1IO0 bits must be different from
77
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
the initial value setup using the T1OC bit otherwise no change will occur on the TM output pin
when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be reset to its initial
level by changing the level of the T1ON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the T1IO1 and T1IO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state
when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by
changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T1IO1 and T1IO0 bits only
after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T1IO1 and
T1IO0 bits are changed when the TM is running
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
T1OC: TP1_0, TP1_1 Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: initial low
1: initial high
PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is
being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode.
It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it
determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM
Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low.
T1POL: TP1_0, TP1_1 Output polarity Control
0: non-invert
1: invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TP1_0 or TP1_1 output pin. When the bit is set high the TM
output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the
Timer/Counter Mode.
T1DPX: TM1 PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and duty
control of the PWM waveform.
T1CCLR: Select TM1 Counter clear condition
0: TM1 Comparatror P match
1: TM1 Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the Standard
TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of which can be selected
to clear the internal counter. With the T1CCLR bit set high, the counter will be cleared when a
compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared
when a compare match occurs from the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter
overflow clearing method can only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The
T1CCLR bit is not used in the PWM, Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode.
78
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TM1DL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
TM1DL: TM1 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0
TM1 10-bit Counter bit 7~bit 0
TM1DH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R
R
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TM1DH: TM1 Counter High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0
TM1 10-bit Counter bit 9~bit 8
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
TM1AL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Bit 7~0
TM1AL: TM1 CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0
TM1 10-bit CCRA bit 7~bit 0
TM1AH Registe
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
Rev. 1.10
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TM1AH: TM1 CCRA High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0
TM1 10-bit CCRA bit 9~bit 8
79
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Standard Type TM Operating Modes
The Standard Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating
mode is selected using the TnM1 and TnM0 bits in the TMnC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register, should be set to 00 respectively. In
this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are a
counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when a
compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows the
counter to overflow. Here both TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and
Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match Output
Mode, the CCRA can not be set to 0.
Counter Value
Counter overflow
CCRP=0
0x3FF
TnCCLR = 0; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
Stop
CCRA
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Output not affected by TnAF
flag. Remains High until reset
by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 0
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to itsinitial state by a TnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.10
80
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change state.
The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a TnAF interrupt request flag is
generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The TnPF interrupt request flag,
generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM output pin.
The way in which the TM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of the TnIO1 and
TnIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits
to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from
Comparator A. The initial condition of the TM output pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes
from low to high, is setup using the TnOC bit. Note that if the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are zero then no
pin change will take place.
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 11 respectively. The
Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode generating the
same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the TM output pin is not used.
Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare Match Output Mode can be
used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this mode, the pin can be used as a
normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
No TnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TnPF not
generated
Output does
not change
TM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnOC=0
Output not affected by
TnAF flag. Remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 1
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TM output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. A TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1
Rev. 1.10
81
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively. The
PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control,
heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty
cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent
DC RMS values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit has no effect on the PWM
operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one
register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while the
other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency or duty
cycle is determined using the TnDPX bit in the TMnC1 register. The PWM waveform frequency and
duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The TnOC bit in the TMnC1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnPOL bit is
used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
·
STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
Period
128
256
384
512
Duty
101b
110b
111b
000b
640
768
896
1024
CCRA
If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b and CCRA =128,
The STM PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125 kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
·
CCRP
STM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, T0DPX=1
001b
010b
011b
100b
Period
Duty
101b
110b
111b
000b
640
768
896
1024
CCRA
128
256
384
512
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the TM clock while
the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value.
Rev. 1.10
82
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnDPX = 0; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Reset when
TnON returns high
CCRP
Pause Resume
Counter Stop if
TnON bit low
CCRA
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
PWM Period
set by CCRP
PWM resumes
operation
Output controlled by
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode -- TnDPX = 0
Note:
1. Here TnDPX=0 -- Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.10
83
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnDPX = 1; TnM [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
by CCRA
Counter Reset when
TnON returns high
CCRA
Pause Resume
Counter Stop if
TnON bit low
CCRP
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRP
PWM Period
set by CCRA
PWM resumes
operation
Output controlled by
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when TnPOL = 1
PWM Mode -- TnDPX = 1
Note:
1. Here TnDPX=1 -- Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when TnIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. The TnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Single Pulse Mode
To select this mode, bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 10 respectively and
also the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode, as the
name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the TM output pin.
The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the TnON bit, which can be
implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the TnON bit can also
be made to automatically change from low to high using the external TCKn pin, which will in turn
initiate the Single Pulse output. When the TnON bit transitions to a high level, the counter will start
running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The TnON bit should remain high when the
pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated when the TnON bit is
cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a compare match
occurs from Comparator A.
Rev. 1.10
84
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
S /W
C o m m a n d
S E T "T n O N "
o r
T C K n P in T r a n s itio n
L e a d in g E d g e
T r a ilin g E d g e
T n O N b it
0 ® 1
T n O N b it
1 ® 0
S /W C o m m a n d
C L R "T n O N "
o r
C C R A M a tc h C o m p a re
T M n O u tp u t P in
P u ls e W id th = C C R A V a lu e
Single Pulse Generation
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the TnON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control the
pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate a TM interrupt. The counter can
only be reset back to zero when the TnON bit changes from low to high when the counter restarts. In
the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The TnCCLR and TnDPX bits are not used in this Mode.
Counter Value
TnM [1:0] = 10 ; TnIO [1:0] = 11
Counter stopped
by CCRA
Counter Reset when
TnON returns high
CCRA
Pause
Counter Stops
by software
Resume
CCRP
Time
TnON
Software
Trigger
Auto. set by
TCKn pin
Cleared by
CCRA match
Software
Trigger
TCKn pin
Software
Trigger
Software
Clear
Software
Trigger
TCKn pin
Trigger
TnPAU
TnPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
No CCRP Interrupts
generated
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=1)
TM O/P Pin
(TnOC=0)
Output Inverts
when TnPOL = 1
Pulse Width
set by CCRA
Single Pulse Mode
Note:
1. Counter stopped by CCRA
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or by setting the TnON bit high
4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit high
5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnIO [1:0] must be set to ²11² and can not be changed.
Rev. 1.10
85
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits TnM1 and TnM0 in the TMnC1 register should be set to 01 respectively. This
mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter and can
therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external signal is supplied
on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin, whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising
and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits in the
TMnC1 register. The counter is started when the TnON bit changes from low to high which is initiated
using the application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin, the present value in the counter
will be latched into the CCRA registers and a TM interrupt generated. Irrespective of what events
occur on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin the counter will continue to free run until the TnON bit changes from
high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs, the counter will reset back to zero; in this way the
CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP compare match occurs
from Comparator P, a TM interrupt will also be generated. Counting the number of overflow interrupt
signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long pulse widths. The TnIO1 and TnIO0
bits can select the active trigger edge on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin to be a rising edge, falling edge or
both edge types. If the TnIO1 and TnIO0 bits are both set high, then no capture operation will take
place irrespective of what happens on the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin, however it must be noted that the
counter will continue to run.
As the TPn_0 or TPn_1 pin is pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the TM is in the
Input Capture Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on this pin
may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The TnCCLR and TnDPX bits are not used in
this Mode.
Counter Value
TnM [1:0] = 01
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Counter
Stop
Reset
CCRP
Resume
YY
Pause
XX
Time
TnON
TnPAU
Active
edge
Active
edge
TM capture
pin TPn_x
Active edge
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA
Value
TnIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00
Rising edge
01
YY
Falling edge
XX
10
Both edges
YY
11
Disable Capture
Capture Input Mode
Note:
1.. TnM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnIO [1:0] bits
2. A TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRA
3. TnCCLR bit not used
4. No output function -- TnOC and TnPOL bits are not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal to
zero.
Rev. 1.10
86
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Enhanced Type TM - ETM
The Enhanced Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output,
Timer/Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Enhanced
TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive three or four external output pins.
CTM
Name
TM No.
TM Input Pin
TM Output Pin
HT68F13/HT68F14
¾
¾
¾
¾
HT68F15
10-bit ETM
1
TCK1
TP1A; TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2
Enhanced TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up/count-down counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or
external clock source. There are three internal comparators with the names, Comparator A,
Comparator B and Comparator P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with the
CCRA, CCRB and CCRP registers. The CCRP comparator is 3 bits wide whose value is compared
with the highest 3 bits in the counter while CCRA and CCRB are 10 bits wide and therefore compared
with all counter bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to clear the
counter by changing the TnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared automatically by
a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators. When these conditions
occur, a TM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Enhanced Type TM can operate in a
number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock sources including an input pin
and can also control output pins. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant internal
registers.
C C R P
C o m p a ra to r P M a tc h
3 - b it C o m p a r a to r P
fS
Y S
/4
fS
Y S
fH /1 6
fH /6 4
fT B C
R e s e rv e d
T C K n
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
b 7 ~ b 9
1 0 - b it U p /D o w n C o u n te r
T n O N
T n P A U
T n C K 2 ~ T n C K 0
b 0 ~ b 9
1 0 - b it
C o m p a ra to r A
T n P F In te rru p t
T n A O C
C o u n te r
C le a r
0
1
T n C C L R
C o m p a ra to r A
O u tp u t
C o n tro l
P o la r ity
C o n tro l
T n A M 1 , T n A M 0
T n A IO 1 , T n A IO 0
T n A P O L
T P n A P in
In p u t/O u tp u t
T P n A
T P n B P in
In p u t/O u tp u t
T P n B -0
T P n B -1
T P n B -2
T n A F
In te rru p t
M a tc h
T n A IO 1 , T n A IO 0
C C R A
E d g e
D e te c to r
T n B O C
1 0 - b it
C o m p a ra to r B
C o m p a ra to r B
M a tc h
T n B F
In te rru p t
C C R B
O u tp u t
C o n tro l
P o la r ity
C o n tro l
T n B M 1 , T n B M 0
T n B IO 1 , T n B IO 0
T n B P O L
E d g e
D e te c to r
T n IO 1 , T n IO 0
Enhanced Type TM Block Diagram
Rev. 1.10
87
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Enhanced Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Enhanced TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only register pair
exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while two read/write register pairs exist to store the
internal 10-bit CCRA and CCRB value. The remaining three registers are control registers which setup
the different operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits.
Name
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TM1C0
T1PAU
T1CK2
T1CK1
T1CK0
T1ON
T1RP2
T1RP1
T1RP0
TM1C1
T1AM1
T1AM0
T1AIO1
T1AIO0
T1AOC
T1APOL
T1CDN
T1CCLR
TM1C2
T1BM1
T1BM0
T1BIO1
T1BIO0
T1BOC
T1BPOL
T1PWM1
T1PWM0
TM1DL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM1DH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
TM1AL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM1AH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
TM1BL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TM1BH
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
10-bit Enhanced TM Register List
TM1C0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T1PAU
T1CK2
T1CK1
T1CK0
T1ON
T1RP2
T1RP1
T1RP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6~4
Rev. 1.10
T1PAU: TM1 Counter Pause Control
0: run
1: pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores normal
counter operation. When in a Pause condition the TM will remain powered up and continue to
consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when this bit changes from low to high
and resume counting from this value when the bit changes to a low value again.
T1CK2~T1CK0: Select TM1 Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fTBC
101: Undefined
110: TCK1 rising edge clock
111: TCK1 falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the TM. Selecting the Reserved clock
input will effectively disable the internal counter. The external pin clock source can be chosen to
be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is the system clock, while fH and
fTBC are other internal clocks, the details of which can be found in the oscillator section.
88
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Bit 3
T1ON: TM1 Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the TM. Setting the bit high enables the counter to
run, clearing the bit disables the TM. Clearing this bit to zero will stop the counter from counting
and turn off the TM which will reduce its power consumption. When the bit changes state from
low to high the internal counter value will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from
high to low, the internal counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again.
If the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode then the TM output pin will be reset to its initial
condition, as specified by the T1OC bit, when the T1ON bit changes from low to high.
T1RP2~T1RP0: TM1 CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the TM1 Counter bit 9~bit 7
Bit 2~0
Comparator P Match Period
000: 1024 TM1 clocks
001: 128 TM1 clocks
010: 256 TM1 clocks
011: 384 TM1 clocks
100: 512 TM1 clocks
101: 640 TM1 clocks
110: 768 TM1 clocks
111: 896 TM1 clocks
These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which are then
compared with the internal counter¢s highest three bits. The result of this comparison can be
selected to clear the internal counter if the T1CCLR bit is set to zero. Setting the T1CCLR bit to
zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values will reset the internal counter. As the
CCRP bits are only compared with the highest three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128
clock cycle multiples. Clearing all three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at
its maximum value.
TM1C1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T1AM1
T1AM0
T1AIO1
T1AIO0
T1AOC
T1APOL
T1CDN
T1CCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Bit 5~4
T1AM1~T1AM0: Select TM1 CCRA Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM
should be switched off before any changes are made to the T1AM1 and T1AM0 bits. In the
Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
T1AIO1~T1AIO0: Select TP1A output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM output inactive state
01: PWM output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of TP1A
01: Input capture at falling edge of TP1A
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP1A
11: Input capture disabled
Rev. 1.10
89
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Timer/counter Mode
Unused
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain
condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the TM is
running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits determine how the TM
output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output
pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match
occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on
the output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T1AOC bit in the
TM1C1 register. Note that the output level requested by the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits must be
different from the initial value setup using the T1AOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the
TM output pin when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be
reset to its initial level by changing the level of the T1ON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes state
when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by
changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T1AIO1 and T1AIO0 bits
only after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T1AIO1
and T1AIO0 bits are changed when the TM is running
T1AOC: TP1A Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is
being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode.
It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it
determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM
Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low.
T1APOL: TP1A Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TP1A output pin. When the bit is set high the TM output pin
will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the TM is in the
Timer/Counter Mode.
T1CDN: TM1 Counter count up or down flag
0: Count up
1: Count down
T1CCLR: Select TM1 Counter clear condition
0: TM1 Comparator P match
1: TM1 Comparator A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the Enhanced
TM contains three comparators, Comparator A, Comparator B and Comparator P, but only
Comparator A or Comparator Pan be selected to clear the internal counter. With the T1CCLR bit
set high, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the
Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can only be
implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The T1CCLR bit is not used in the
Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode.
90
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TM1C2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
T1BM1
T1BM0
T1BIO1
T1BIO0
T1BOC
T1BPOL
T1PWM1
T1PWM0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Bit 5~4
T1BM1~T1BM0: Select TM1 CCRB Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the TM. To ensure reliable operation the TM
should be switched off before any changes are made to the T1BM1 and T1BM0 bits. In the
Timer/Counter Mode, the TM output pin control must be disabled.
T1BIO1~T1BIO0: Select TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM output inactive state
01: PWM output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2
01: Input capture at falling edge of TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/counter Mode
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the TM output pin changes state when a certain
condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which mode the
TM is running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits determine how the TM
output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The TM output
pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state when a compare match
occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both zero, then no change will take place on
the output. The initial value of the TM output pin should be setup using the T1BOC bit in the
TM1C2 register. Note that the output level requested by the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits must be
different from the initial value setup using the T1BOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the
TM output pin when a compare match occurs. After the TM output pin changes state it can be
reset to its initial level by changing the level of the T1ON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Mode, the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits determine how the TM output pin changes
state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output function is modified by
changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of the T1BIO1 and T1BIO0 bits only
after the TM has been switched off. Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the T1BIO1 and
T1BIO0 bits are changed when the TM is running
Rev. 1.10
91
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Bit 3
T1BOC: TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the TM output pin. Its operation depends upon whether TM is
being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode.
It has no effect if the TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it
determines the logic level of the TM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM
Mode it determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low.
T1BPOL: TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TB1B_2 Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the TP1B_0, TP1B_1, TP1B_2 output pin. When the bit is set
high the TM output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the
TM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
T1PWM1~T1PWM0: Select PWM Mode
00: Edge aligned
01: Centre aligned, compare match on count up
10: Centre aligned, compare match on count down
11: Centre aligned, compare match on count up or down
Bit 2
Bit 1~0
TM1DL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
TM1DL: TM1 Counter Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0
TM1 10-bit Counter bit 7~bit 0
TM1DH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R
R
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
Bit 1~0
TM1DH: TM1 Counter High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0
TM1 10-bit Counter bit 9~bit 8
TM1AL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
Rev. 1.10
TM1AL: TM1 CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0
TM1 10-bit CCRA bit 7~bit 0
92
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TM1AH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TM1AH: TM1 CCRA High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0
TM1 10-bit CCRA bit 9~bit 8
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
TM1BL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
TM1BL: TM1 CCRB Low Byte Register bit 7~bit 0
TM1 10-bit CCRB bit 7~bit 0
TM1BH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
D9
D8
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
Unimplemented, read as ²0²
TM1BH: TM1 CCRB High Byte Register bit 1~bit 0
TM1 10-bit CCRB bit 9 ~ bit 8
Enhanced Type TM Operating Modes
The Enhanced Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The
operating mode is selected using the TnAM1 and TnAM0 bits in the TMnC1, and the TnBM1 and
TnBM0 bits in the TMnC2 register.
ETM Operating Mode
CCRA
CCRA
CCRA Single CCRA Input
Compare
CCRA PWM
Timer/Count
Pulse Output
Capture
Match
Output Mode
er Mode
Mode
Mode
Output Mode
CCRB Compare Match Output Mode
Ö
¾
¾
¾
¾
CCRB Timer/Counter Mode
¾
Ö
¾
¾
¾
CCRB PWM Output Mode
¾
¾
Ö
¾
¾
CCRB Single Pulse Output Mode
¾
¾
¾
Ö
¾
CCRB Input Capture Mode
¾
¾
¾
¾
Ö
²Ö²: permitted; ²¾² : not permitted
Rev. 1.10
93
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Compare Output Mode
To select this mode, bits TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 in the TMnC1/TMnC2 registers
should be all cleared to zero. In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by
three methods. These are a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare
match from Comparator P. When the TnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can
be cleared. One is when a compare match occurs from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits
are all zero which allows the counter to overflow. Here both the TnAF and TnPF interrupt request flags
for Comparator A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the TnCCLR bit in the TMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the TnAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
TnCCLR is high no TnPF interrupt request flag will be generated.
Counter overflow
Counter Value
CCRP=0
0x3FF
TnCCLR = 0; TnAM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
Stop
CCRA
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnAPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TPnA O/P
Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnAOC=0
Output not affected by TnAF
flag. Remains High until reset
by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnAIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnAIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnAPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
ETM CCRA Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 0
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TPnA output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.10
94
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change state.
The TM output pin condition however only changes state when a TnAF or TnBF interrupt request flag
is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A or Comparator B. The TnPF interrupt
request flag, generated from a compare match from Comparator P, will have no effect on the TM
output pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state is determined by the condition of the
TnAIO1 and TnAIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register for ETM CCRA, and the TnBIO1 and TnBIO0 bits
in the TMnC2 register for ETM CCRB. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnAIO1,
TnAIO0 bits (for the TPnA pin) and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits (for the TPnB_0, TPnB_1 or TPnB_2 pins)
to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from
Comparator A or a compare match occurs from Comparator B. The initial condition of the TM output
pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the TnAOC or TnBOC
bit for TPnA or TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 output pins. Note that if the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and
TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Counter overflow
Counter Value
CCRP=0
0x3FF
TnCCLR = 0; TnBM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
Stop
CCRB
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnBPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
TPnB O/P
Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnBOC=0
Output not affected by TnBF
flag. Remains High until reset
by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnBF flag
Here TnBIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnBIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnBPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
ETM CCRB Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 0
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The TPnB output pin is controlled only by the TnBF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.10
95
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the TM output pin, will change state.
The TM output pin condition however only changes state when an TnAF or TnBF interrupt request
flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A or Comparator B. The TnPF
interrupt request flag, generated from a compare match from Comparator P, will have no effect on the
TM output pin. The way in which the TM output pin changes state is determined by the condition of
the TnAIO1 and TnAIO0 bits in the TMnC1 register for ETM CCRA, and the TnBIO1 and TnBIO0
bits in the TMnC2 register for ETM CCRB. The TM output pin can be selected using the TnAIO1,
TnAIO0 bits (for the TPnA pin) and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits (for the TPnB_0, TPnB_1 or TPnB_2 pins)
to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare match occurs from
Comparator A or a compare match occurs from Comparator B. The initial condition of the TM output
pin, which is setup after the TnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the TnAOC or TnBOC
bit for TPnA or TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 output pins. Note that if the TnAIO1,TnAIO0 and
TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnAM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnAPOL
No TnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TnPF not
generated
Output does
not change
TPnA O/P
Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnAOC=0
Output not affected by
TnAF flag. Remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Output Toggle with
TnAF flag
Here TnAIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note TnAIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnAPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
ETM CCRA Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 1
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TPnA output pin is controlled only by the TnAF flag
3. The TPnA output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1
Rev. 1.10
96
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnBM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
Resume
CCRA
Pause
CCRA=0
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRB
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnBPOL
No TnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
TPnB O/P
Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if TnBOC=0
Output Toggle with
TnBF flag
Here TnBIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Output not affected by
TnBF flag. Remains High
until reset by TnON bit
Note TnBIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when TnBPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
ETM CCRB Compare Match Output Mode -- TnCCLR = 1
Note:
1. With TnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The TPnB output pin is controlled only by the TnBF flag
3. The TPnB output pin is reset to its initial state by a TnON bit rising edge
4. The TnPF flag is not generated when TnCCLR=1
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 in the TMnC1 and TMnC2 register
should all be set high. The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match
Output Mode generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the
TM output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare
Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this
mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, the required bit pairs, TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 should be set to 10
respectively and also the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits should be set to 10 respectively.
The PWM function within the TM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor
control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of
varying duty cycle on the TM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying
equivalent DC RMS values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM mode, the TnCCLR bit is used to determine in which way
the PWM period is controlled. With the TnCCLR bit set high, the PWM period can be finely controlled
using the CCRA registers. In this case the CCRB registers are used to set the PWM duty value (for
TPnB output pins). The CCRP bits are not used and TPnA output pin is not used. The PWM output can
Rev. 1.10
97
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
only be generated on the TPnB output pins. With the TnCCLR bit cleared to zero, the PWM period is
set using one of the eight values of the three CCRP bits, in multiples of 128. Now both CCRA and
CCRB registers can be used to setup different duty cycle values to provide dual PWM outputs on their
relative TPnA and TPnB pins.
The TnPWM1 and TnPWM0 bits determine the PWM alignment type, which can be either edge or
centre type. In edge alignment, the leading edge of the PWM signals will all be generated concurrently
when the counter is reset to zero. With all power currents switching on at the same time, this may give
rise to problems in higher power applications. In centre alignment the centre of the PWM active
signals will occur sequentially, thus reducing the level of simultaneous power switching currents.
Interrupt flags, one for each of the CCRA, CCRB and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either the Comparator A, Comparator B or Comparator P. The TnAOC and TnBOC bits in
the TMnC1 and TMnC2 register are used to select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while
the two TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits pairs are used to enable the PWM output or to
force the TM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The TnAPOL and TnBPOL bit are used to reverse
the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
·
ETM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
000b
Period
128
256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
A Duty
CCRA
B Duty
CCRB
If fSYS = 16MHz, TM clock source select fSYS/4, CCRP = 100b, CCRA = 128 and CCRB = 256,
The TP1A PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125kHz, duty = 128/512 = 25%.
The TP1B_n PWM output frequency = (fSYS/4) / 512 = fSYS/2048 = 7.8125kHz, duty = 256/512 =
50%.
If the Duty value defined by CCRA or CCRB register is equal to or greater than the Period value,
then the PWM output duty is 100%.
·
ETM, PWM Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=1
CCRA
1
2
3
511
512
1021
1022
1023
Period
1
2
3
511
512
1021
1022
1023
B Duty
CCRB
·
ETM, PWM Mode, Center-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
000b
Period
256
512
768
1024
1280
1536
1792
2046
A Duty
(CCRA´2)-1
B Duty
(CCRB´2)-1
·
ETM, PWM Mode, Center-aligned Mode, TnCCLR=1
CCRA
1
2
3
511
512
1021
1022
1023
Period
2
4
6
1022
1024
2042
2044
2046
B Duty
Rev. 1.10
(CCRB´2)-1
98
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 0;
TnAM [1:0] = 10, TnBM [1:0] = 10;
TnPWM [1:0] = 00
Counter Cleared by CCRP
CCRP
CCRA
Pause
Resume
Stop
Counter
Restart
CCRB
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnAPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TPnA Pin
(TnAOC=1)
TPnB Pin
Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
Output Inverts
when TnAPOL
is high
(TnBOC=1)
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=0)
Duty Cycle
set by CCRB
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
PWM Period set by CCRP
ETM PWM Mode -- Edge Aligned
Note:
1. Here TnCCLR=0 therefore CCRP clears counter and determines the PWM period
2. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnAIO [1:0] (or TnBIO [1:0]) = 00 or 01
3. CCRA controls the TPnA PWM duty and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty
Rev. 1.10
99
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnBM [1:0] = 10;
TnPWM [1:0] = 00
Counter Cleared by CCRA
CCRA
Pause
Resume
Stop
Counter
Restart
CCRB
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnBPOL
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=1)
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=0)
Duty Cycle
set by CCRB
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
PWM Period set by CCRA
Output Pin
Reset to
Initial value
Output Inverts
when TnBPOL
is high
ETM PWM Mode -- Edge Aligned
Note:
1. Here TnCCLR=1 therefore CCRA clears the counter and determines the PWM period
2. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnBIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
3. The CCRA controls the TPnB PWM period and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty
4. Here the TM pin control register should not enable the TPnA pin as a TM output pin.
Rev. 1.10
100
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 0;
TnAM [1:0] = 10, TnBM [1:0] = 10;
TnPWM [1:0] = 11
CCRP
Resume
CCRA
Stop
Counter
Restart
Pause
CCRB
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnAPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TPnA Pin
(TnAOC=1)
Duty Cycle set by CCRA
Output Inverts
when TnAPOL
is high
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=1)
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=0)
Duty Cycle set by CCRB
Output controlled by
Other pin-shared function
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
PWM Period set by CCRP
ETM PWM Mode -- Centre Aligned
Note:
1. Here TnCCLR=0 therefore CCRP clears the counter and determines the PWM period
2. TnPWM [1:0] =11 therefore the PWM is centre aligned
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnAIO [1:0] (or TnBIO [1:0]) = 00 or 01
4. CCRA controls the TPnA PWM duty and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty
5. CCRP will generate an interrupt request when the counter decrements to its zero value
Rev. 1.10
101
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnCCLR = 1; TnBM [1:0] = 10;
TnPWM [1:0] = 11
CCRA
Resume
Stop
Counter
Restart
Pause
CCRB
Time
TnON
TnPAU
TnBPOL
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=1)
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=0)
Output controlled
Output Inverts
by other pin-shared
when TnBPOL is high
function
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Duty Cycle set by CCRB
PWM Period set by CCRA
ETM PWM Mode -- Centre Aligned
Note:
1. Here TnCCLR=1 therefore CCRA clears the counter and determines the PWM period
2. TnPWM [1:0] =11 therefore the PWM is centre aligned
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when TnBIO [1:0] = 00 or 01
4. CCRA controls the TPnB PWM period and CCRB controls the TPnB PWM duty
5. CCRP will generate an interrupt request when the counter decrements to its zero value
Single Pulse Output Mode
To select this mode, the required bit pairs, TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 should be set to 10
respectively and also the corresponding TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits should be set to
11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode, as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse
on the TM output pin.
The trigger for the pulse TPnA output leading edge is a low to high transition of the TnON bit, which
can be implemented using the application program. The trigger for the pulse TPnB output leading edge
is a compare match from Comparator B, which can be implemented using the application program.
However in the Single Pulse Mode, the TnON bit can also be made to automatically change from low
to high using the external TCKn pin, which will in turn initiate the Single Pulse output of TPnA. When
the TnON bit transitions to a high level, the counter will start running and the pulse leading edge of
TPnA will be generated. The TnON bit should remain high when the pulse is in its active state. The
generated pulse trailing edge of TPnA and TPnB will be generated when the TnON bit is cleared to
zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a compare match occurs from
Comparator A.
Rev. 1.10
102
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the TnON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge of TPnA and TPnB. In this way the CCRA value can be
used to control the pulse width of TPnA. The CCRA-CCRB value can be used to control the pulse width
of TPnB. A compare match from Comparator A and Comparator B will also generate TM interrupts. The
counter can only be reset back to zero when the TnON bit changes from low to high when the counter
restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The TnCCLR bit is also not used.
Single Pulse Generation
Rev. 1.10
103
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Counter Value
TnAM [1:0] = 10, TnBM [1:0] = 10;
TnAIO [1:0] = 11, TnBIO [1:0] = 11
Counter stopped
by CCRA
CCRA
Pause
Counter Stops
by software
Resume
Counter Reset
when TnON
returns high
CCRB
Time
TnON
Software
Trigger
Cleared by
CCRA match
Auto. set by
TCKn pin
Software
Trigger
TCKn pin
Software
Trigger
Software
Clear
Software
Trigger
TCKn pin
Trigger
TnPAU
TnAPOL
TnBPOL
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
TPnA Pin
(TnAOC=1)
TPnA Pin
Pulse Width
set by CCRA
(TnAOC=0)
Output Inverts
when TnAPOL=1
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=1)
TPnB Pin
(TnBOC=0)
Pulse Width set
by (CCRA-CCRB)
Output Inverts
when TnBPOL=1
Single Pulse Mode
Note:
1. Counter stopped by CCRA
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by the TCKn pin or by setting the TnON bit high
4. A TCKn pin active edge will automatically set the TnON bit high
5. In the Single Pulse Mode, TnAIO [1:0] and TnBIO [1:0] must be set to ²11² and can not be changed.
Rev. 1.10
104
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits TnAM1, TnAM0 and TnBM1, TnBM0 in the TMnC1 and TMnC2 registers
should be set to 01 respectively. This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present
value of the internal counter and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width
measurements. The external signal is supplied on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins,
whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising and falling edges; the active
edge transition type is selected using the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits in the TMnC1
and TMnC2 registers. The counter is started when the TnON bit changes from low to high which is
initiated using the application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins the
present value in the counter will be latched into the CCRA and CCRB registers and a TM interrupt
generated. Irrespective of what events occur on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins the
counter will continue to free run until the TnON bit changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare
match occurs the counter will reset back to zero; in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the
maximum counter value. When a CCRP compare match occurs from Comparator P, a TM interrupt
will also be generated. Counting the number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a
useful method in measuring long pulse widths. The TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits can
select the active trigger edge on the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins to be a rising edge,
falling edge or both edge types. If the TnAIO1, TnAIO0 and TnBIO1, TnBIO0 bits are both set high,
then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the TPnA and TPnB_0,
TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run.
Counter Value
TnAM [1:0] = 01
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Counter
Stop
Reset
CCRP
Resume
YY
Pause
XX
Time
TnON
TnPAU
Active
edge
Active
edge
TM capture
pin TPnA
Active edge
CCRA Int.
Flag TnAF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRA
Value
TnAIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00
Rising edge
01
YY
Falling edge
XX
10
Both edges
YY
11
Disable Capture
ETM CCRA Capture Input Mode
Note:
1. TnAM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnAIO [1:0] bits
2. The TM Capture input pin active edge transfers he counter value to CCRA
3. TnCCLR bit not used
4. No output function -- TnAOC and TnAPOL bits not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP is equal
to zero.
Rev. 1.10
105
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
As the TPnA and TPnB_0, TPnB_1, TPnB_2 pins are pin shared with other functions, care must be
taken if the TM is in the Capture Input Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any
transitions on this pin may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The TnCCLR, TnAOC,
TnBOC, TnAPOL and TnBPOL bits are not used in this mode.
Counter Value
TnBM [1:0] = 01
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Counter
Stop
Reset
CCRP
Resume
YY
Pause
XX
Time
TnON
TnPAU
Active
edge
Active
edge
TM capture
pin TPnB_x
Active edge
CCRB Int.
Flag TnBF
CCRP Int.
Flag TnPF
CCRB
Value
TnBIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00
Rising edge
01
YY
Falling edge
XX
10
Both edges
YY
11
Disable Capture
ETM CCRB Capture Input Mode
Note:
1. TnBM [1:0] = 01 and active edge set by the TnBIO [1:0] bits
2. The TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRB
3. TnCCLR bit not used
4. No output function -- TnBOC and TnBPOL bits not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when CCRP
is equal to zero.
Rev. 1.10
106
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Interrupts
Interrupts are an important part of any microcontroller system. When an external event or an internal
function such as a Timer Module requires microcontroller attention, their corresponding interrupt will
enforce a temporary suspension of the main program allowing the microcontroller to direct attention to
their respective needs. The device contains several external interrupt and internal interrupts functions.
The external interrupts are generated by the action of the external INT0 and INT1 pins while the
internal interrupts are generated by various internal functions such as the TMs, Time Base, and LVD.
Interrupt Registers
Overall interrupt control, which basically means the setting of request flags when certain
microcontroller conditions occur and the setting of interrupt enable bits by the application program, is
controlled by a series of registers, located in the Special Purpose Data Memory, as shown in the
accompanying table. The number of registers depends upon the device chosen but fall into three
categories. The first is the INTC0~INTC1 registers which setup the primary interrupts, the second is
the MFI0~MFI1 registers which setup the Multi-function interrupts. Finally there is an INTEG register
to setup the external interrupt trigger edge type.
Each register contains a number of enable bits to enable or disable individual registers as well as
interrupt flags to indicate the presence of an interrupt request. The naming convention of these follows
a specific pattern. First is listed an abbreviated interrupt type, then the (optional) number of that
interrupt followed by either an ²E² for enable/ disable bit or ²F² for request flag.
Function
Enable Bit
Request Flag
Notes
EMI
¾
¾
INTn Pin
INTnE
INTnF
n = 0 or 1
Multi-function
MFnE
MFnF
n = 0 or 1
Time Base
TBE
TBF
¾
LVD
LVE
LVF
¾
TnPE
TnPF
TnAE
TnAF
TnBE
TnBF
Global
n = 0 or 1
TM
n=1
Interrupt Register Bit Naming Conventions
Rev. 1.10
107
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Interrupt Register Contents - HT68F13
Name
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTEG
¾
¾
¾
¾
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
INTC0
¾
T1PF
INT1F
INT0F
T1PE
INT1E
INT0E
EMI
INTC1
LVF
TBF
¾
T1AF
LVE
TBE
¾
T1AE
Interrupt Register Contents - HT68F14
Name
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
¾
¾
¾
¾
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
INTC0
¾
MF0F
INT1F
INT0F
MF0E
INT1E
INT0E
EMI
INTC1
LVF
TBF
¾
MF1F
LVE
TBE
¾
MF1E
MFI0
¾
¾
T0AF
T0PF
¾
¾
T0AE
T0PE
MFI1
¾
¾
T1AF
T1PF
¾
¾
T1AE
T1PE
INTEG
Interrupt Register Contents - HT68F15
Name
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTEG
¾
¾
¾
¾
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
INTC0
¾
MF0F
INT1F
INT0F
MF0E
INT1E
INT0E
EMI
INTC1
LVF
TBF
¾
MF1F
LVE
TBE
¾
MF1E
MFI0
¾
¾
T0AF
T0PF
¾
¾
T0AE
T0PE
MFI1
¾
T1BF
T1AF
T1PF
¾
T1BE
T1AE
T1PE
INTEG Register - HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
¾
¾
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
¾
¾
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~4
Bit 3~2
Bit 1~0
Rev. 1.10
unimplemented, read as ²0²
INT1S1, INT1S0: interrupt edge control for INT1 pin
00: disable
01: rising edge
10: falling edge
11: both rising and falling edges
INT0S1, INT0S0: interrupt edge control for INT0 pin
00: disable
01: rising edge
10: falling edge
11: both rising and falling edges
108
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
INTC0 Register - HT68F13
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
T1PF
INT1F
INT0F
T1PE
INT1E
INT0E
EMI
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1PF: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
INT1F: INT1 interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
INT0F: INT0 interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
T1PE: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
INT1E: INT1 interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
INT0E: INT0 interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
EMI: Global interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
INTC0 Register - HT68F14/HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
MF0F
INT1F
INT0F
MF0E
INT1E
INT0E
EMI
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
unimplemented, read as ²0²
MF0F: Multi-function 0 Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
INT1F: INT1 interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
INT0F: INT0 interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
MF0E: Multi-function 0 Interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
INT1E: INT1 interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
INT0E: INT0 interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
EMI: Global interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
109
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
INTC1 Register - HT68F13
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
LVF
TBF
¾
T1AF
LVE
TBE
¾
T1AE
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
R/W
POR
0
0
¾
0
0
0
¾
0
3
2
1
0
Bit 7
LVF: LVD Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
TBF: Time Base Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1AF: TM1 Comparator A match Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
LVE: LVD interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
TBE: Time Base interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1AE: TM1 Comparator A match Interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
INTC1 Register - HT68F14/HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
LVF
TBF
¾
MF1F
LVE
TBE
¾
MF1E
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
R/W
POR
0
0
¾
0
0
0
¾
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
LVF: LVD Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
TBF: Time Base Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
unimplemented, read as ²0²
MF1F: Multi-function 1 Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
LVE: LVD interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
TBE: Time Base interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
unimplemented, read as ²0²
MF1E: Multi-function 1 Interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
110
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MFI0 Register - HT68F14/HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
T0AF
T0PF
¾
¾
T0AE
T0PE
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
0
0
¾
¾
0
0
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T0AF: TM0 Comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
T0PF: TM0 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
Bit 7~6
Bit 5
Bit 4
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T0AE: TM0 Comparator A match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
T0PE: TM0 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
Bit 3~2
Bit 1
Bit 0
MFI1 Register - HT68F14
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
T1AF
T1PF
¾
¾
T1AE
T1PE
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
0
0
¾
¾
0
0
Bit 7~6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3~2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1AF: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
T1PF: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1AE: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
T1PE: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
111
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MFI1 Register - HT68F15
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
T1BF
T1AF
T1PF
¾
T1BE
T1AE
T1PE
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
0
0
0
¾
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1BF: TM1 Comparator B match Interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
T1AF: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
T1PF: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: no request
1: interrupt request
unimplemented, read as ²0²
T1BE: TM1 Comparator B match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
T1AE: TM1 Comparator A match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
T1PE: TM1 Comparator P match interrupt control
0: disable
1: enable
Interrupt Operation
When the conditions for an interrupt event occur, such as a TM Comparator P, Comparator A or
Comparator B match, etc., the relevant interrupt request flag will be set. Whether the request flag
actually generates a program jump to the relevant interrupt vector is determined by the condition of the
interrupt enable bit. If the enable bit is set high then the program will jump to its relevant vector; if the
enable bit is zero then although the interrupt request flag is set an actual interrupt will not be generated
and the program will not jump to the relevant interrupt vector. The global interrupt enable bit, if cleared
to zero, will disable all interrupts.
When an interrupt is generated, the Program Counter, which stores the address of the next instruction
to be executed, will be transferred onto the stack. The Program Counter will then be loaded with a new
address which will be the value of the corresponding interrupt vector. The microcontroller will then
fetch its next instruction from this interrupt vector. The instruction at this vector will usually be a
²JMP² which will jump to another section of program which is known as the interrupt service routine.
Here is located the code to control the appropriate interrupt. The interrupt service routine must be
terminated with a ²RETI², which retrieves the original Program Counter address from the stack and
allows the microcontroller to continue with normal execution at the point where the interrupt occurred.
The various interrupt enable bits, together with their associated request flags, are shown in the
accompanying diagrams with their order of priority. Some interrupt sources have their own individual
vector while others share the same multi-function interrupt vector. Once an interrupt subroutine is
serviced, all the other interrupts will be blocked, as the global interrupt enable bit, EMI bit will be
cleared automatically. This will prevent any further interrupt nesting from occurring. However, if other
interrupt requests occur during this interval, although the interrupt will not be immediately serviced,
the request flag will still be recorded.
Rev. 1.10
112
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
If an interrupt requires immediate servicing while the program is already in another interrupt service
routine, the EMI bit should be set after entering the routine, to allow interrupt nesting. If the stack is
full, the interrupt request will not be acknowledged, even if the related interrupt is enabled, until the
Stack Pointer is decremented. If immediate service is desired, the stack must be prevented from
becoming full. In case of simultaneous requests, the accompanying diagram shows the priority that is
applied. All of the interrupt request flags when set will wake-up the device if it is in SLEEP or IDLE
Mode, however to prevent a wake-up from occurring the corresponding flag should be set before the
device is in SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
Legend
Request Flag, auto
reset in ISR
Enable Bits
xxF
xxE
EMI auto disabled in ISR
Interrupt
Name
INT0 Pin
Request
Flags
INT0F
Enable
Bits
INT0E
Master
Enable
EMI
INT1 Pin
INT1F
INT1E
EMI
08H
TM1 P
T1PF
T1PE
EMI
0CH
TM1 A
T1AF
T1AE
EMI
10H
Time Base
TBF
TBE
EMI
18H
LVD
LVF
LVE
EMI
1CH
Vector
04H
Priority
High
Low
Interrupt Structure - HT68F13
xxF
Legend
Request Flag, no auto reset in ISR
xxF
Request Flag, auto reset in ISR
xxE
Enable Bits
EMI auto disabled in ISR
Interrupt
Name
INT0 Pin
Request
Flags
INT0F
Enable
Bits
INT0E
Master
Enable
EMI
Vector
04H
TM0 P
T0PF
T0PE
INT1 Pin
INT1F
INT1E
EMI
08H
TM0 A
T0AF
T0AE
M. Funct. 0
MF0F
MF0E
EMI
0CH
TM1 P
T1PF
T1PE
M. Funct. 1
MF1F
MF1E
EMI
10H
TM1 A
T1AF
T1AE
Time Base
TBF
TBE
EMI
18H
LVD
LVF
LVE
EMI
1CH
Interrupts contained within
Multi-Function Interrupts
Priority
High
Low
Interrupt Structure - HT68F14
Rev. 1.10
113
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Legend
xxF
Request Flag, no auto reset in ISR
xxF
Request Flag, auto reset in ISR
xxE
Enable Bits
EMI auto disabled in ISR
Interrupt
Name
INT0 Pin
Request
Flags
INT0F
Enable
Bits
INT0E
Master
Enable
EMI
Vector
04H
TM0 P
T0PF
T0PE
INT1 Pin
INT1F
INT1E
EMI
08H
TM0 A
T0AF
T0AE
M. Funct. 0
MF0F
MF0E
EMI
0CH
TM1 P
T1PF
T1PE
M. Funct. 1
MF1F
MF1E
EMI
10H
TM1 A
T1AF
T1AE
Time Base
TBF
TBE
EMI
18H
TM1 B
T1BF
T1BE
LVD
LVF
LVE
EMI
1CH
Interrupts contained within
Multi-Function Interrupts
Priority
High
Low
Interrupt Structure - HT68F15
External Interrupt
The external interrupts are controlled by signal transitions on the pins INT0~INT1. An external
interrupt request will take place when the external interrupt request flags, INT0F~INT1F, are set,
which will occur when a transition, whose type is chosen by the edge select bits, appears on the
external interrupt pins. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the
global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and respective external interrupt enable bit, INT0E~INT1E, must first
be set. Additionally the correct interrupt edge type must be selected using the INTEG register to enable
the external interrupt function and to choose the trigger edge type. As the external interrupt pins are
pin-shared with I/O pins, they can only be configured as external interrupt pins if their external
interrupt enable bit in the corresponding interrupt register has been set. The pin must also be setup as
an input by setting the corresponding bit in the port control register. When the interrupt is enabled, the
stack is not full and the correct transition type appears on the external interrupt pin, a subroutine call to
the external interrupt vector, will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the external interrupt
request flags, INT0F~INT1F, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared
to disable other interrupts. Note that any pull-high resistor selections on the external interrupt pins will
remain valid even if the pin is used as an external interrupt input.
The INTEG register is used to select the type of active edge that will trigger the external interrupt. A
choice of either rising or falling or both edge types can be chosen to trigger an external interrupt. Note
that the INTEG register can also be used to disable the external interrupt function.
Rev. 1.10
114
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Multi-function Interrupt
Within these devices there are up to six Multi-function interrupts. Unlike the other independent
interrupts, these interrupts have no independent source, but rather are formed from other existing
interrupt sources, namely the TM Interrupts.
A Multi-function interrupt request will take place when any of the Multi-function interrupt request
flags, MF0F~MF1F are set. The Multi-function interrupt flags will be set when any of their included
functions generate an interrupt request flag. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt
vector address, when the Multi-function interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, and either one of
the interrupts contained within each of Multi-function interrupt occurs, a subroutine call to one of the
Multi-function interrupt vectors will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the related
Multi-Function request flag, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared
to disable other interrupts.
However, it must be noted that, although the Multi-function Interrupt flags will be automatically reset
when the interrupt is serviced, the request flags from the original source of the Multi-function
interrupts, namely the TM Interrupts, will not be automatically reset and must be manually reset by the
application program.
Time Base Interrupts
The function of the Time Base Interrupt is to provide regular time signal in the form of an internal
interrupt. It is controlled by the overflow signal from the respective timer function. When this happens,
the respective interrupt request flags TBF will be set. To allow the program to branch to their
respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit EMI and Time Base enable bit
TBE must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the Time Base overflows,
a subroutine call to their respective vector locations will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the
respective interrupt request flag TBF will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be cleared to
disable other interrupts.
The purpose of the Time Base Interrupt is to provide an interrupt signal at fixed time periods. Their
clock sources originate from the internal clock source fTB. This fTB input clock passes through a
divider, the division ratio of which is selected by programming the appropriate bits in the TBC register
to obtain longer interrupt periods whose value ranges. The clock source that generates fTB, which in
turn controls the Time Base interrupt period, can originate from several different sources, as shown in
the System Operating Mode section.
fS
Y S
fT
/4
B C
M U X
M U X
fT
B
D iv id e b y 2
1 2
~ 2
1 5
T im e B a s e In te r r u p t
T B 1 ~ T B 0
Time Base Interrupt
Note: The fTBC is from the LIRC oscillator.
Rev. 1.10
115
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TBON
TBCK
TB1
TB0
¾
¾
¾
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
¾
¾
¾
¾
POR
0
0
1
1
¾
¾
¾
¾
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5~4
Bit 3~0
TBON: Time Base control
0: disable
1: enable
TBCK: Time Base clock fTB selection
0: fTBC
1: fSYS/4
TB1~TB0: Select Time Base Time-out Period
00: 4096/fTB
01: 8192/fTB
10: 16384/fTB
11: 32768/fTB
unimplemented, read as ²0²
LVD Interrupt
The Low Voltage Detector Interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. A LVD Interrupt
request will take place when the LVD Interrupt request flag, LVF, is set, which occurs when the Low
Voltage Detector function detects a low power supply voltage. To allow the program to branch to its
respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, Low Voltage Interrupt enable
bit, LVE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, must first be set. When the interrupt is
enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to the Multi-function
Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Low Voltage Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be
automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request
flag will be also automatically cleared. As the LVF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be
cleared by the application program.
TM Interrupts
The Compact and Standard Type TMs have two interrupts each, while the Enhanced Type TM has
three interrupts. All of the TM interrupts are contained within the Multi-function Interrupts in these
devices except HT68F13. For each of the Compact and Standard Type TMs there are two interrupt
request flags TnPF and TnAF and two enable bits TnPE and TnAE. For the Enhanced Type TM there
are three interrupt request flags TnPF, TnAF and TnBF and three enable bits TnPE, TnAE and TnBE.
A TM interrupt request will take place when any of the TM request flags are set, a situation which
occurs when a TM comparator P, A or B match situation happens.
To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable
bit, EMI, respective TM Interrupt enable bit, and relevant Multi-function Interrupt enable bit, MFnE,
must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a TM comparator match
situation occurs, a subroutine call to the relevant Multi-function Interrupt vector locations, will take
place. When the TM interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts, however only the related MFnF flag will be automatically cleared. As the TM interrupt
request flags will not be automatically cleared, they have to be cleared by the application program.
Rev. 1.10
116
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Interrupt Wake-up Function
Each of the interrupt functions has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when in the SLEEP
or IDLE Mode. A wake-up is generated when an interrupt request flag changes from low to high and is
independent of whether the interrupt is enabled or not. Therefore, even though the device is in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode and its system oscillator stopped, situations such as external edge transitions on
the external interrupt pins, a low power supply voltage or comparator input change may cause their
respective interrupt flag to be set high and consequently generate an interrupt. Care must therefore be
taken if spurious wake-up situations are to be avoided. If an interrupt wake-up function is to be
disabled then the corresponding interrupt request flag should be set high before the device enters the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode. The interrupt enable bits have no effect on the interrupt wake-up function.
Programming Considerations
By disabling the relevant interrupt enable bits, a requested interrupt can be prevented from being
serviced, however, once an interrupt request flag is set, it will remain in this condition in the interrupt
register until the corresponding interrupt is serviced or until the request flag is cleared by the
application program.
Where a certain interrupt is contained within a Multi-function interrupt, then when the interrupt
service routine is executed, as only the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MF0F~MF1F, will be
automatically cleared, the individual request flag for the function needs to be cleared by the application
program.
It is recommended that programs do not use the ²CALL² instruction within the interrupt service
subroutine. Interrupts often occur in an unpredictable manner or need to be serviced immediately. If
only one stack is left and the interrupt is not well controlled, the original control sequence will be
damaged once a CALL subroutine is executed in the interrupt subroutine.
Every interrupt has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when it is in SLEEP or IDLE
Mode, the wake up being generated when the interrupt request flag changes from low to high. If it is
required to prevent a certain interrupt from waking up the microcontroller then its respective request
flag should be first set high before enter SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
As only the Program Counter is pushed onto the stack, then when the interrupt is serviced, if the
contents of the accumulator, status register or other registers are altered by the interrupt service
program, their contents should be saved to the memory at the beginning of the interrupt service
routine.
To return from an interrupt subroutine, either a ²RET² or ²RETI² instruction may be executed. The
RETI instruction in addition to executing a return to the main program also automatically sets the EMI
bit high to allow further interrupts. The RET instruction however only executes a return to the main
program leaving the EMI bit in its present zero state and therefore disabling the execution of further
interrupts.
Rev. 1.10
117
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Power Down Mode and Wake-up
Entering the IDLE or SLEEP Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP or IDLE Mode and that is to execute the
²HALT² instruction in the application program. When this instruction is executed, the following will
occur:
·
The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the HALT instruction.
·
The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
·
The WDT will be cleared and resume counting if the WDT clock source is selected to come from the
fSUB clock source and the WDT is enabled. The WDT will stop if its clock source originates from the
system clock.
·
The I/O ports will maintain their present condition.
·
In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Standby Current Considerations
As the main reason for entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode is to keep the current consumption of the
device to as low a value as possible, perhaps only in the order of several micro-amps, there are other
considerations which must also be taken into account by the circuit designer if the power consumption
is to be minimised. Special attention must be made to the I/O pins on the device. All high-impedance
input pins must be connected to either a fixed high or low level as any floating input pins could create
internal oscillations and result in increased current consumption. This also applies to devices which
have different package types, as there may be unbonbed pins. These must either be setup as outputs or
if setup as inputs must have pull-high resistors connected. Care must also be taken with the loads,
which are connected to I/O pins, which are setup as outputs. These should be placed in a condition in
which minimum current is drawn or connected only to external circuits that do not draw current, such
as other CMOS inputs. Also note that additional standby current will also be required if the
configuration options have enabled the LIRC oscillator.
Wake-up
After the system enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, it can be woken up from one of various sources
listed as follows:
·
An external reset
·
An external falling edge on Port A
·
A system interrupt
·
A WDT overflow
If the system is woken up by an external reset, the device will experience a full system reset, however,
if the device is woken up by a WDT overflow, a Watchdog Timer reset will be initiated. Although both
of these wake-up methods will initiate a reset operation, the actual source of the wake-up can be
determined by examining the TO and PDF flags. The PDF flag is cleared by a system power-up or
executing the clear Watchdog Timer instructions and is set when executing the HALT instruction. The
TO flag is set if a WDT time-out occurs, and causes a wake-up that only resets the Program Counter
and Stack Pointer, the other flags remain in their original status.
Each pin on Port A can be setup using the PAWU register to permit a negative transition on the pin to
wake-up the system. When a Port A pin wake-up occurs, the program will resume execution at the
instruction following the ²HALT² instruction.
Rev. 1.10
118
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
If the system is woken up by an interrupt, then two possible situations may occur. The first is where the
related interrupt is disabled or the interrupt is enabled but the stack is full, in which case the program
will resume execution at the instruction following the HALT instruction. In this situation, the interrupt
which woke-up the device will not be immediately serviced, but will rather be serviced later when the
related interrupt is finally enabled or when a stack level becomes free. The other situation is where the
related interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, in which case the regular interrupt response takes
place. If an interrupt request flag is set high before entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake-up
function of the related interrupt will be disabled.
Low Voltage Detector - LVD
Each device has a Low Voltage Detector function, also known as LVD. This enabled the device to
monitor the power supply voltage, VDD, and provide a warning signal should it fall below a certain
level. This function may be especially useful in battery applications where the supply voltage will
gradually reduce as the battery ages, as it allows an early warning battery low signal to be generated.
The Low Voltage Detector also has the capability of generating an interrupt signal.
LVD Register
The Low Voltage Detector function is controlled using a single register with the name LVDC. Three
bits in this register, VLVD2~VLVD0, are used to select one of eight fixed voltages below which a low
voltage condition will be determined. A low voltage condition is indicated when the LVDO bit is set. If
the LVDO bit is low, this indicates that the VDD voltage is above the preset low voltage value. The
LVDEN bit is used to control the overall on/off function of the low voltage detector. Setting the bit high
will enable the low voltage detector. Clearing the bit to zero will switch off the internal low voltage
detector circuits. As the low voltage detector will consume a certain amount of power, it may be
desirable to switch off the circuit when not in use, an important consideration in power sensitive
battery powered applications.
LVDC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
¾
¾
LVDO
LVDEN
¾
VLVD2
VLVD1
VLVD0
R/W
¾
¾
R
R/W
¾
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
¾
¾
0
0
¾
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Bit 5
Bit
Bit 3
Bit 2~0
Rev. 1.10
unimplemented, read as ²0²
LVDO: LVD Output Flag
0: no low voltage detect
1: low voltage detect
LVDEN: low voltage detector control
0: disable
1: enable
unimplemented, read as ²0²
VLVD2 ~ VLVD0: select LVD voltage
000: 2.0V
001: 2.2V
010: 2.4V
011: 2.7V
100: 3.0V
101: 3.3V
110: 3.6V
111: 4.4V
119
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector function operates by comparing the power supply voltage, VDD, with a
pre-specified voltage level stored in the LVDC register. This has a range of between 2.0V and 4.4V.
When the power supply voltage, VDD, falls below this pre-determined value, the LVDO bit will be set
high indicating a low power supply voltage condition. The Low Voltage Detector function is supplied
by a reference voltage which will be automatically enabled. When the device is powered down the low
voltage detector will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. After enabling the Low Voltage Detector,
a time delay tLVDS should be allowed for the circuitry to stabilise before reading the LVDO bit. Note also
that as the VDD voltage may rise and fall rather slowly, at the voltage nears that of VLVD, there may be
multiple bit LVDO transitions.
V D D
V
L V D
L V D E N
L V D O
tL
V D S
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector also has its own interrupt which is contained within one of the
Multi-function interrupts, providing an alternative means of low voltage detection, in addition to
polling the LVDO bit. The interrupt will only be generated after a delay of tLVD after the LVDO bit has
been set high by a low voltage condition. When the device is powered down the Low Voltage Detector
will remain active if the LVDEN bit is high. In this case, the LVF interrupt request flag will be set,
causing an interrupt to be generated if VDD falls below the preset LVD voltage. This will cause the
device to wake-up from the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, however if the Low Voltage Detector wake up
function is not required then the LVF flag should be first set high before the device enters the SLEEP or
IDLE Mode.
SCOM Function for LCD
The devices have the capability of driving external LCD panels. The common pins for LCD driving,
SCOM0~ SCOM3, are pin shared with certain pin on the PC0~PC1 and PB6 ~ PB7 pins. The LCD
signals (COM and SEG) are generated using the application program.
LCD Operation
An external LCD panel can be driven using this device by configuring the PC0~PC1 or PB6 ~ PB7
pins as common pins and using other output ports lines as segment pins. The LCD driver function is
controlled using the SCOMC register which in addition to controlling the overall on/off function also
controls the bias voltage setup function. This enables the LCD COM driver to generate the necessary
VDD/2 voltage levels for LCD 1/2 bias operation.
V
D D
S C O M
V
D D
o p e r a tin g c u r r e n t
/2
S C O M 0 ~
S C O M 3
C O M n E N
S C O M E N
LCD COM Bias
Rev. 1.10
120
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
The SCOMEN bit in the SCOMC register is the overall master control for the LCD driver; however
this bit is used in conjunction with the COMnEN bits to select which Port C pins are used for LCD
driving. Note that the Port Control register does not need to first setup the pins as outputs to enable the
LCD driver operation.
SCOMEN
COMnEN
Pin Function
O/P Level
0
X
I/O
0 or 1
1
0
I/O
0 or 1
1
1
SCOMn
VDD/2
Output Control
LCD Bias Control
The LCD COM driver enables a range of selections to be provided to suit the requirement of the LCD
panel which is being used. The bias resistor choice is implemented using the ISEL1 and ISEL0 bits in
the SCOMC register.
SCOMC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
ISEL1
ISEL0
SCOMEN
COM3EN
COM2EN
COM1EN
COM0EN
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6~5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 1.10
Reserved Bit
0: Correct level - bit must be reset to zero for correct operation
1: Unpredictable operation - bit must not be set high
ISEL1, ISEL0: ISEL1 ~ ISEL0: Select SCOM typical bias current (VDD=5V)
00: 25mA
01: 50mA
10: 100mA
11: 200mA
SCOMEN: SCOM module control
0: disable
1: enable
COM3EN: GPIO or SCOM3 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM3
COM2EN: GPIO or SCOM2 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM2
COM1EN: GPIO or SCOM1 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM1
COM0EN: GPIO or SCOM0 selection
0: GPIO
1: SCOM0
121
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Configuration Options
Configuration options refer to certain options within the MCU that are programmed into the device
during the programming process. During the development process, these options are selected using the
HT-IDE software development tools. As these options are programmed into the device using the
hardware programming tools, once they are selected they cannot be changed later using the application
program. All options must be defined for proper system function, the details of which are shown in the
table.
No.
Options
Oscillator Options
1
High Speed System Oscillator Selection - fH: HXT, ERC, HIRC
2
High Speed Internal RC Frequency Selection: 4MHz, 8MHz or 12MHz
Reset Pin Options
3
Pin function: RES or PB3
Watchdog Options
4
Watchdog Timer: enable or disable
5
Watchdog Timer clock source Selection: fSUB or fSYS/4
Note: The fSUB and the fTBC clock source are the LIRC oscillator.
6
CLRWDT instructions: 1 or 2 instructions
LVR Options
7
LVR function: enable or disable
8
LVR voltage: 2.10V, 2.55V, 3.15V or 4.2V
Application Circuits
0 .0 1 m F * *
0 .1 m F
V
D D
V D D
R e s e t
C ir c u it
1 0 k W ~
1 0 0 k W
1 N 4 1 4 8 *
0 .1 ~ 1 m F
3 0 0 W *
R E S
V S S
P A 4 ~ P A 7
P B 0 , P B 4 ~ P B 7
P C 0 ~ P C 7
P D 0 ~ P D 1
O S C 1
O S C
C ir c u it
O S C 2
S e e O s c illa to r
S e c tio n
Note:
²*² It is recommended that this component is added for added ESD protection.
²**² It is recommended that this component is added in environments where power line noise is significant.
Rev. 1.10
122
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Instruction Set
Introduction
Central to the successful operation of any microcontroller is its instruction set, which is a set of
program instruction codes that directs the microcontroller to perform certain operations. In the case of
Holtek microcontrollers, a comprehensive and flexible set of over 60 instructions is provided to enable
programmers to implement their application with the minimum of programming overheads.
For easier understanding of the various instruction codes, they have been subdivided into several
functional groupings.
Instruction Timing
Most instructions are implemented within one instruction cycle. The exceptions to this are branch, call,
or table read instructions where two instruction cycles are required. One instruction cycle is equal to 4
system clock cycles, therefore in the case of an 8MHz system oscillator, most instructions would be
implemented within 0.5ms and branch or call instructions would be implemented within 1ms. Although
instructions which require one more cycle to implement are generally limited to the JMP, CALL, RET,
RETI and table read instructions, it is important to realize that any other instructions which involve
manipulation of the Program Counter Low register or PCL will also take one more cycle to implement.
As instructions which change the contents of the PCL will imply a direct jump to that new address, one
more cycle will be required. Examples of such instructions would be ²CLR PCL² or ²MOV PCL, A².
For the case of skip instructions, it must be noted that if the result of the comparison involves a skip
operation then this will also take one more cycle, if no skip is involved then only one cycle is required.
Moving and Transferring Data
The transfer of data within the microcontroller program is one of the most frequently used operations.
Making use of three kinds of MOV instructions, data can be transferred from registers to the
Accumulator and vice-versa as well as being able to move specific immediate data directly into the
Accumulator. One of the most important data transfer applications is to receive data from the input
ports and transfer data to the output ports.
Arithmetic Operations
The ability to perform certain arithmetic operations and data manipulation is a necessary feature of
most microcontroller applications. Within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set are a range of add
and subtract instruction mnemonics to enable the necessary arithmetic to be carried out. Care must be
taken to ensure correct handling of carry and borrow data when results exceed 255 for addition and less
than 0 for subtraction. The increment and decrement instructions INC, INCA, DEC and DECA
provide a simple means of increasing or decreasing by a value of one of the values in the destination
specified.
Logical and Rotate Operations
The standard logical operations such as AND, OR, XOR and CPL all have their own instruction within
the Holtek microcontroller instruction set. As with the case of most instructions involving data
manipulation, data must pass through the Accumulator which may involve additional programming
steps. In all logical data operations, the zero flag may be set if the result of the operation is zero.
Another form of logical data manipulation comes from the rotate instructions such as RR, RL, RRC
and RLC which provide a simple means of rotating one bit right or left. Different rotate instructions
exist depending on program requirements. Rotate instructions are useful for serial port programming
applications where data can be rotated from an internal register into the Carry bit from where it can be
examined and the necessary serial bit set high or low. Another application where rotate data operations
are used is to implement multiplication and division calculations.
Rev. 1.10
123
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Branches and Control Transfer
Program branching takes the form of either jumps to specified locations using the JMP instruction or to
a subroutine using the CALL instruction. They differ in the sense that in the case of a subroutine call,
the program must return to the instruction immediately when the subroutine has been carried out. This
is done by placing a return instruction RET in the subroutine which will cause the program to jump
back to the address right after the CALL instruction. In the case of a JMP instruction, the program
simply jumps to the desired location. There is no requirement to jump back to the original jumping off
point as in the case of the CALL instruction. One special and extremely useful set of branch
instructions are the conditional branches. Here a decision is first made regarding the condition of a
certain data memory or individual bits. Depending upon the conditions, the program will continue with
the next instruction or skip over it and jump to the following instruction. These instructions are the key
to decision making and branching within the program perhaps determined by the condition of certain
input switches or by the condition of internal data bits.
Bit Operations
The ability to provide single bit operations on Data Memory is an extremely flexible feature of all
Holtek microcontrollers. This feature is especially useful for output port bit programming where
individual bits or port pins can be directly set high or low using either the ²SET [m].i² or ²CLR [m].i²
instructions respectively. The feature removes the need for programmers to first read the 8-bit output
port, manipulate the input data to ensure that other bits are not changed and then output the port with
the correct new data. This read-modify-write process is taken care of automatically when these bit
operation instructions are used.
Table Read Operations
Data storage is normally implemented by using registers. However, when working with large amounts
of fixed data, the volume involved often makes it inconvenient to store the fixed data in the Data
Memory. To overcome this problem, Holtek microcontrollers allow an area of Program Memory to be
setup as a table where data can be directly stored. A set of easy to use instructions provides the means
by which this fixed data can be referenced and retrieved from the Program Memory.
Other Operations
In addition to the above functional instructions, a range of other instructions also exist such as the
²HALT² instruction for Power-down operations and instructions to control the operation of the
Watchdog Timer for reliable program operations under extreme electric or electromagnetic
environments. For their relevant operations, refer to the functional related sections.
Rev. 1.10
124
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Instruction Set Summary
The following table depicts a summary of the instruction set categorised according to function and can
be consulted as a basic instruction reference using the following listed conventions.
Table conventions:
x: Bits immediate data
m: Data Memory address
A: Accumulator
i: 0~7 number of bits
addr: Program memory address
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1Note
1Note
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
C
1
1
1
1Note
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment Data Memory
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Decrement Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1Note
Z
Z
Z
Z
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
None
None
C
C
None
None
C
C
Move Data Memory to ACC
Move ACC to Data Memory
Move immediate data to ACC
1
1Note
1
None
None
None
Arithmetic
ADD A,[m]
ADDM A,[m]
ADD A,x
ADC A,[m]
ADCM A,[m]
SUB A,x
SUB A,[m]
SUBM A,[m]
SBC A,[m]
SBCM A,[m]
DAA [m]
Add Data Memory to ACC
Add ACC to Data Memory
Add immediate data to ACC
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
Add ACC to Data memory with Carry
Subtract immediate data from the ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry, result in Data Memory
Decimal adjust ACC for Addition with result in Data Memory
Logic Operation
AND A,[m]
OR A,[m]
XOR A,[m]
ANDM A,[m]
ORM A,[m]
XORM A,[m]
AND A,x
OR A,x
XOR A,x
CPL [m]
CPLA [m]
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Logical AND immediate Data to ACC
Logical OR immediate Data to ACC
Logical XOR immediate Data to ACC
Complement Data Memory
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment & Decrement
INCA [m]
INC [m]
DECA [m]
DEC [m]
Rotate
RRA [m]
RR [m]
RRCA [m]
RRC [m]
RLA [m]
RL [m]
RLCA [m]
RLC [m]
Data Move
MOV A,[m]
MOV [m],A
MOV A,x
Rev. 1.10
125
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Clear bit of Data Memory
Set bit of Data Memory
1Note
1Note
None
None
Jump unconditionally
Skip if Data Memory is zero
Skip if Data Memory is zero with data movement to ACC
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is zero
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Subroutine call
Return from subroutine
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
Return from interrupt
2
1Note
1note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
2
2
2
2
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
2Note
2Note
None
None
No operation
Clear Data Memory
Set Data Memory
Clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
Enter power down mode
1
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
1
None
None
None
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
None
None
TO, PDF
Bit Operation
CLR [m].i
SET [m].i
Branch
JMP addr
SZ [m]
SZA [m]
SZ [m].i
SNZ [m].i
SIZ [m]
SDZ [m]
SIZA [m]
SDZA [m]
CALL addr
RET
RET A,x
RETI
Table Read
TABRDC [m]
TABRDL [m]
Miscellaneous
NOP
CLR [m]
SET [m]
CLR WDT
CLR WDT1
CLR WDT2
SWAP [m]
SWAPA [m]
HALT
Note:
1. For skip instructions, if the result of the comparison involves a skip then two cycles are required,
if no skip takes place only one cycle is required.
2. Any instruction which changes the contents of the PCL will also require 2 cycles for execution.
3. For the ²CLR WDT1² and ²CLR WDT2² instructions the TO and PDF flags may be affected by the
execution status. The TO and PDF flags are cleared after both ²CLR WDT1² and ²CLR WDT2² instructions
are consecutively executed. Otherwise the TO and PDF flags remain unchanged.
Rev. 1.10
126
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Instruction Definition
ADC A,[m]
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC + [m] + C
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
ADCM A,[m]
Add ACC to Data Memory with Carry
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added.
The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC + [m] + C
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
ADD A,[m]
Add Data Memory to ACC
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is
stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC + [m]
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
ADD A,x
Add immediate data to ACC
Description
The contents of the Accumulator and the specified immediate data are added. The result
is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC + x
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
ADDM A,[m]
Add ACC to Data Memory
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is
stored in the specified Data Memory.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC + [m]
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
AND A,[m]
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Description
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical AND
operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC ²AND² [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
AND A,x
Logical AND immediate data to ACC
Description
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical
AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC ²AND² x
Affected flag(s)
Z
ANDM A,[m]
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical AND
operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC ²AND² [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
Rev. 1.10
127
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
CALL addr
Subroutine call
Description
Unconditionally calls a subroutine at the specified address. The Program Counter then
increments by 1 to obtain the address of the next instruction which is then pushed onto
the stack. The specified address is then loaded and the program continues execution
from this new address. As this instruction requires an additional operation, it is a two cycle instruction.
Operation
Stack ¬ Program Counter + 1
Program Counter ¬ addr
Affected flag(s)
None
CLR [m]
Clear Data Memory
Description
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
Operation
[m] ¬ 00H
Affected flag(s)
None
CLR [m].i
Clear bit of Data Memory
Description
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
Operation
[m].i ¬ 0
Affected flag(s)
None
CLR WDT
Clear Watchdog Timer
Description
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared.
Operation
WDT cleared
TO ¬ 0
PDF ¬ 0
Affected flag(s)
TO, PDF
CLR WDT1
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Description
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction with CLR WDT2 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT2 to have effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT2
will have no effect.
Operation
WDT cleared
TO ¬ 0
PDF ¬ 0
Affected flag(s)
TO, PDF
CLR WDT2
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Description
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction with CLR WDT1 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT1 to have effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT1
will have no effect.
Operation
WDT cleared
TO ¬ 0
PDF ¬ 0
Affected flag(s)
TO, PDF
Rev. 1.10
128
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
CPL [m]
Complement Data Memory
Description
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1¢s complement).
Bits which previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa.
Operation
[m] ¬ [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
CPLA [m]
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Description
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1¢s complement).
Bits which previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa. The complemented
result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
DAA [m]
Decimal-Adjust ACC for addition with result in Data Memory
Description
Convert the contents of the Accumulator value to a BCD ( Binary Coded Decimal) value
resulting from the previous addition of two BCD variables. If the low nibble is greater
than 9 or if AC flag is set, then a value of 6 will be added to the low nibble. Otherwise the
low nibble remains unchanged. If the high nibble is greater than 9 or if the C flag is set,
then a value of 6 will be added to the high nibble. Essentially, the decimal conversion is
performed by adding 00H, 06H, 60H or 66H depending on the Accumulator and flag
conditions. Only the C flag may be affected by this instruction which indicates that if the
original BCD sum is greater than 100, it allows multiple precision decimal addition.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC + 00H or
[m] ¬ ACC + 06H or
[m] ¬ ACC + 60H or
[m] ¬ ACC + 66H
Affected flag(s)
C
DEC [m]
Decrement Data Memory
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1.
Operation
[m] ¬ [m] - 1
Affected flag(s)
Z
DECA [m]
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m] - 1
Affected flag(s)
Z
HALT
Enter power down mode
Description
This instruction stops the program execution and turns off the system clock. The contents of the Data Memory and registers are retained. The WDT and prescaler are cleared.
The power down flag PDF is set and the WDT time-out flag TO is cleared.
Operation
TO ¬ 0
PDF ¬ 1
Affected flag(s)
TO, PDF
Rev. 1.10
129
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
INC [m]
Increment Data Memory
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1.
Operation
[m] ¬ [m] + 1
Affected flag(s)
Z
INCA [m]
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m] + 1
Affected flag(s)
Z
JMP addr
Jump unconditionally
Description
The contents of the Program Counter are replaced with the specified address. Program
execution then continues from this new address. As this requires the insertion of a
dummy instruction while the new address is loaded, it is a two cycle instruction.
Operation
Program Counter ¬ addr
Affected flag(s)
None
MOV A,[m]
Move Data Memory to ACC
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m]
Affected flag(s)
None
MOV A,x
Move immediate data to ACC
Description
The immediate data specified is loaded into the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ x
Affected flag(s)
None
MOV [m],A
Move ACC to Data Memory
Description
The contents of the Accumulator are copied to the specified Data Memory.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC
Affected flag(s)
None
NOP
No operation
Description
No operation is performed. Execution continues with the next instruction.
Operation
No operation
Affected flag(s)
None
OR A,[m]
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Description
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical OR
operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC ²OR² [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
Rev. 1.10
130
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
OR A,x
Logical OR immediate data to ACC
Description
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical OR
operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC ²OR² x
Affected flag(s)
Z
ORM A,[m]
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical OR
operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC ²OR² [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
RET
Return from subroutine
Description
The Program Counter is restored from the stack. Program execution continues at the restored address.
Operation
Program Counter ¬ Stack
Affected flag(s)
None
RET A,x
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
Description
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the Accumulator loaded with the
specified immediate data. Program execution continues at the restored address.
Operation
Program Counter ¬ Stack
ACC ¬ x
Affected flag(s)
None
RETI
Return from interrupt
Description
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the interrupts are re-enabled by setting the EMI bit. EMI is the master interrupt global enable bit. If an interrupt was pending when the RETI instruction is executed, the pending Interrupt routine will be
processed before returning to the main program.
Operation
Program Counter ¬ Stack
EMI ¬ 1
Affected flag(s)
None
RL [m]
Rotate Data Memory left
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into
bit 0.
Operation
[m].(i+1) ¬ [m].i; (i = 0~6)
[m].0 ¬ [m].7
Affected flag(s)
None
RLA [m]
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into
bit 0. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC.(i+1) ¬ [m].i; (i = 0~6)
ACC.0 ¬ [m].7
Affected flag(s)
None
Rev. 1.10
131
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
RLC [m]
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit
7 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 0.
Operation
[m].(i+1) ¬ [m].i; (i = 0~6)
[m].0 ¬ C
C ¬ [m].7
Affected flag(s)
C
RLCA [m]
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into the bit 0. The rotated result
is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC.(i+1) ¬ [m].i; (i = 0~6)
ACC.0 ¬ C
C ¬ [m].7
Affected flag(s)
C
RR [m]
Rotate Data Memory right
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated
into bit 7.
Operation
[m].i ¬ [m].(i+1); (i = 0~6)
[m].7 ¬ [m].0
Affected flag(s)
None
RRA [m]
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0
rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the
Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC.i ¬ [m].(i+1); (i = 0~6)
ACC.7 ¬ [m].0
Affected flag(s)
None
RRC [m]
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit.
Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7.
Operation
[m].i ¬ [m].(i+1); (i = 0~6)
[m].7 ¬ C
C ¬ [m].0
Affected flag(s)
C
RRCA [m]
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is
stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC.i ¬ [m].(i+1); (i = 0~6)
ACC.7 ¬ C
C ¬ [m].0
Affected flag(s)
C
Rev. 1.10
132
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SBC A,[m]
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are
subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if
the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result
is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC - [m] - C
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
SBCM A,[m]
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry and result in Data Memory
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are
subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if
the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result
is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC - [m] - C
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
SDZ [m]
Skip if decrement Data Memory is 0
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0
the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0
the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
[m] ¬ [m] - 1
Skip if [m] = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SDZA [m]
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0,
the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a
dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If
the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m] - 1
Skip if ACC = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SET [m]
Set Data Memory
Description
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
Operation
[m] ¬ FFH
Affected flag(s)
None
SET [m].i
Set bit of Data Memory
Description
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
Operation
[m].i ¬ 1
Affected flag(s)
None
Rev. 1.10
133
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SIZ [m]
Skip if increment Data Memory is 0
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0,
the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0
the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
[m] ¬ [m] + 1
Skip if [m] = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SIZA [m]
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0,
the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a
dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If
the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m] + 1
Skip if ACC = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SNZ [m].i
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not 0
Description
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is not 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this
requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a
two cycle instruction. If the result is 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
Skip if [m].i ¹ 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SUB A,[m]
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
Description
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C
flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to
1.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC - [m]
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
SUBM A,[m]
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
Description
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C
flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to
1.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC - [m]
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
SUB A,x
Subtract immediate data from ACC
Description
The immediate data specified by the code is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag
will be set to 1.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC - x
Affected flag(s)
OV, Z, AC, C
Rev. 1.10
134
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SWAP [m]
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
Description
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged.
Operation
[m].3~[m].0 « [m].7 ~ [m].4
Affected flag(s)
None
SWAPA [m]
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
Description
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged.
The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
Operation
ACC.3 ~ ACC.0 ¬ [m].7 ~ [m].4
ACC.7 ~ ACC.4 ¬ [m].3 ~ [m].0
Affected flag(s)
None
SZ [m]
Skip if Data Memory is 0
Description
If the contents of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped.
As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is
fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the
following instruction.
Operation
Skip if [m] = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SZA [m]
Skip if Data Memory is 0 with data movement to ACC
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator. If the value is
zero, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is
not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
ACC ¬ [m]
Skip if [m] = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
SZ [m].i
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is 0
Description
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a
two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Operation
Skip if [m].i = 0
Affected flag(s)
None
TABRDC [m]
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Description
The low byte of the program code (current page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP)
is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
Operation
[m] ¬ program code (low byte)
TBLH ¬ program code (high byte)
Affected flag(s)
None
Rev. 1.10
135
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
TABRDL [m]
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Description
The low byte of the program code (last page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is
moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
Operation
[m] ¬ program code (low byte)
TBLH ¬ program code (high byte)
Affected flag(s)
None
XOR A,[m]
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Description
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical XOR
operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC ²XOR² [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
XORM A,[m]
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Description
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical XOR
operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
Operation
[m] ¬ ACC ²XOR² [m]
Affected flag(s)
Z
XOR A,x
Logical XOR immediate data to ACC
Description
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical
XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
ACC ¬ ACC ²XOR² x
Affected flag(s)
Z
Rev. 1.10
136
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Package Information
16-pin DIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
A
B
A
1 6
9
1
8
B
1 6
9
1
8
H
H
C
C
D
D
G
E
G
E
I
F
Fig1. Full Lead Packages
I
F
Fig2. 1/2 Lead Packages
MS-001d (see fig1)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.780
¾
0.880
B
0.240
¾
0.280
C
0.115
¾
0.195
D
0.115
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
0.070
F
0.045
¾
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
¾
0.430
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
19.81
¾
22.35
B
6.10
¾
7.11
C
2.92
¾
4.95
D
2.92
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.78
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
¾
10.92
137
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MS-001d (see fig2)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.735
¾
0.775
B
0.240
¾
0.280
C
0.115
¾
0.195
D
0.115
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
F
0.045
¾
0.070
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
¾
0.430
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
18.67
¾
19.69
B
6.10
¾
7.11
C
2.92
¾
4.95
D
2.92
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.78
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
¾
10.92
138
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MO-095a (see fig2)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.745
¾
0.785
B
0.275
¾
0.295
C
0.120
¾
0.150
D
0.110
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
F
0.045
¾
0.060
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
¾
0.430
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
18.92
¾
19.94
B
6.99
¾
7.49
C
3.05
¾
3.81
D
2.79
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.52
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
¾
10.92
139
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
16-pin NSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
A
1 6
9
1
B
8
C
C '
G
D
E
H
a
F
MS-012
Symbol
A
Min.
Nom.
Max.
0.228
¾
0.244
B
0.150
¾
0.157
C
0.012
¾
0.020
C¢
0.386
¾
0.402
D
¾
¾
0.069
E
¾
0.050
¾
F
0.004
¾
0.010
G
0.016
¾
0.050
H
0.007
¾
0.010
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
5.79
¾
6.20
B
3.81
¾
3.99
C
0.30
¾
0.51
C¢
9.80
¾
10.21
D
¾
¾
1.75
E
¾
1.27
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.25
G
0.41
¾
1.27
H
0.18
¾
0.25
a
0°
¾
8°
140
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
16-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
9
1 6
A
B
1
8
C
C '
G
D
E
Symbol
A
a
F
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
0.228
¾
0.244
B
0.150
¾
0.157
C
0.008
¾
0.012
C¢
0.189
¾
0.197
D
0.054
¾
0.060
E
¾
0.025
¾
F
0.004
¾
0.010
G
0.022
¾
0.028
H
0.007
¾
0.010
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
H
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
5.79
¾
6.20
B
3.81
¾
3.99
C
0.20
¾
0.30
C¢
4.80
¾
5.00
D
1.37
¾
1.52
E
¾
0.64
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.25
G
0.56
¾
0.71
H
0.18
¾
0.25
a
0°
¾
8°
141
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
20-pin DIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
A
B
A
2 0
1 1
1
1 0
B
2 0
1 1
1 0
1
H
H
C
C
D
D
E
F
I
G
E
F
Fig1. Full Lead Packages
I
G
Fig2. 1/2 Lead Packages
MS-001d (see fig1)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.980
¾
1.060
B
0.240
¾
0.280
C
0.115
¾
0.195
D
0.115
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
F
0.045
¾
0.070
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
0.430
¾
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
24.89
¾
26.92
B
6.10
¾
7.11
C
2.92
¾
4.95
D
2.92
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.78
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
10.92
¾
142
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MO-095a (see fig2)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.945
¾
0.985
B
0.275
¾
0.295
C
0.120
¾
0.150
D
0.110
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
F
0.045
¾
0.060
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
0.430
¾
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
24.00
¾
25.02
B
6.99
¾
7.49
C
3.05
¾
3.81
D
2.79
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.52
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
10.92
¾
143
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
20-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
1 1
2 0
A
B
1
1 0
C
C '
G
D
E
H
a
F
MS-013
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.393
¾
0.419
B
0.256
¾
0.300
C
0.012
¾
0.020
C¢
0.496
¾
0.512
D
¾
¾
0.104
E
¾
0.050
¾
F
0.004
¾
0.012
G
0.016
¾
0.050
H
0.008
¾
0.013
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
A
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
9.98
¾
10.64
B
6.50
¾
7.62
C
0.30
¾
0.51
C¢
12.60
¾
13.00
D
¾
¾
2.64
E
¾
1.27
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.30
G
0.41
¾
1.27
H
0.20
¾
0.33
a
0°
¾
8°
144
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
20-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
1 1
2 0
A
B
1
1 0
C
C '
G
D
E
Symbol
a
F
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
0.228
¾
0.244
B
0.150
¾
0.158
C
0.008
¾
0.012
C¢
0.335
¾
0.347
D
0.049
¾
0.065
E
¾
0.025
¾
F
0.004
¾
0.010
G
0.015
¾
0.050
H
0.007
¾
0.010
a
0°
¾
8°
A
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
H
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
5.79
¾
6.20
B
3.81
¾
4.01
C
0.20
¾
0.30
C¢
8.51
¾
8.81
D
1.24
¾
1.65
E
¾
0.64
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.25
G
0.38
¾
1.27
H
0.18
¾
0.25
a
0°
¾
8°
145
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
24-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
A
A
1 3
2 4
B
1 3
2 4
B
1 2
1
1 2
1
H
H
C
C
D
E
F
D
I
G
E
F
I
G
Fig2. 1/2 Lead Packages
Fig1. Full Lead Packages
MS-001d (see fig1)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
1.230
¾
1.280
B
0.240
¾
0.280
C
0.115
¾
0.195
D
0.115
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
0.070
F
0.045
¾
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
0.430
¾
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
31.24
¾
32.51
B
6.10
¾
7.11
C
2.92
¾
4.95
D
2.92
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.78
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
10.92
¾
146
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MS-001d (see fig2)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
1.160
¾
1.195
B
0.240
¾
0.280
C
0.115
¾
0.195
D
0.115
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
F
0.045
¾
0.070
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
0.430
¾
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
29.46
¾
30.35
B
6.10
¾
7.11
C
2.92
¾
4.95
D
2.92
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.78
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
10.92
¾
147
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
MO-095a (see fig2)
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
1.145
¾
1.185
B
0.275
¾
0.295
C
0.120
¾
0.150
D
0.110
¾
0.150
E
0.014
¾
0.022
F
0.045
¾
0.060
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.300
¾
0.325
I
¾
0.430
¾
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
29.08
¾
30.10
B
6.99
¾
7.49
C
3.05
¾
3.81
D
2.79
¾
3.81
E
0.36
¾
0.56
F
1.14
¾
1.52
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.62
¾
8.26
I
¾
10.92
¾
148
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
24-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
1 3
2 4
A
B
1
1 2
C
C '
G
D
E
H
a
F
MS-013
Symbol
Nom.
Max.
A
0.393
¾
0.419
B
0.256
¾
0.300
C
0.012
¾
0.020
C¢
0.598
¾
0.613
D
¾
¾
0.104
E
¾
0.050
¾
F
0.004
¾
0.012
G
0.016
¾
0.050
H
0.008
¾
0.013
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
A
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
9.98
¾
10.64
B
6.50
¾
7.62
C
0.30
¾
0.51
C¢
15.19
¾
15.57
D
¾
¾
2.64
E
¾
1.27
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.30
G
0.41
¾
1.27
H
0.20
¾
0.33
a
0°
¾
8°
149
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
24-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
1 3
2 4
A
B
1
1 2
C
C '
G
D
E
Symbol
a
F
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
0.228
¾
0.244
B
0.150
¾
0.157
C
0.008
¾
0.012
C¢
0.335
¾
0.346
D
0.054
¾
0.060
E
¾
0.025
¾
A
F
0.004
¾
0.010
G
0.022
¾
0.028
H
0.007
¾
0.010
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
H
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
5.79
¾
6.20
B
3.81
¾
3.99
C
0.20
¾
0.30
C¢
8.51
¾
8.79
D
1.37
¾
1.52
E
¾
0.64
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.25
G
0.56
¾
0.71
H
0.18
¾
0.25
a
0°
¾
8°
150
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
28-pin SKDIP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
A
B
2 8
1 5
1
1 4
H
C
D
E
Symbol
A
I
G
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
1.375
¾
1.395
B
0.278
¾
0.298
C
0.125
¾
0.135
D
0.125
¾
0.145
E
0.016
¾
0.020
F
0.050
¾
0.070
G
¾
0.100
¾
H
0.295
¾
0.315
I
¾
0.375
¾
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
F
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
34.93
¾
35.43
B
7.06
¾
7.57
C
3.18
¾
3.43
D
3.18
¾
3.68
E
0.41
¾
0.51
1.78
F
1.27
¾
G
¾
2.54
¾
H
7.49
¾
8.00
I
¾
9.53
¾
151
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
28-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
2 8
1 5
A
B
1
1 4
C
C '
G
D
E
H
a
F
MS-013
Symbol
A
Min.
Nom.
Max.
0.393
¾
0.419
B
0.256
¾
0.300
C
0.012
¾
0.020
C¢
0.697
¾
0.713
D
¾
¾
0.104
E
¾
0.050
¾
F
0.004
¾
0.012
G
0.016
¾
0.050
H
0.008
¾
0.013
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in inch
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
9.98
¾
10.64
B
6.50
¾
7.62
C
0.30
¾
0.51
C¢
17.70
¾
18.11
D
¾
¾
2.64
E
¾
1.27
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.30
G
0.41
¾
1.27
H
0.20
¾
0.33
a
0°
¾
8°
152
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
28-pin SSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
1 5
2 8
A
B
1
1 4
C
C '
G
D
E
Symbol
a
F
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
0.228
¾
0.244
B
0.150
¾
0.157
C
0.008
¾
0.012
C¢
0.386
¾
0.394
D
0.054
¾
0.060
E
¾
0.025
¾
A
F
0.004
¾
0.010
G
0.022
¾
0.028
H
0.007
¾
0.010
a
0°
¾
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.10
H
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
5.79
¾
6.20
B
3.81
¾
3.99
C
0.20
¾
0.30
C¢
9.80
¾
10.01
D
1.37
¾
1.52
E
¾
0.64
¾
F
0.10
¾
0.25
G
0.56
¾
0.71
H
0.18
¾
0.25
a
0°
¾
8°
153
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Reel Dimensions
D
T 2
A
C
B
T 1
SOP 16N (150mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
A
Reel Outer Diameter
330.0±1.0
B
Reel Inner Diameter
100.0±1.5
C
Spindle Hole Diameter
D
Key Slit Width
T1
Space Between Flange
T2
Reel Thickness
13.0
+0.5/-0.2
2.0±0.5
16.8
+0.3/-0.2
22.2±0.2
SOP 20W, SOP 24W, SOP 28W (300mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
A
Reel Outer Diameter
330.0±1.0
B
Reel Inner Diameter
100.0±1.5
C
Spindle Hole Diameter
D
Key Slit Width
T1
Space Between Flange
T2
Reel Thickness
Rev. 1.10
13.0
+0.5/-0.2
2.0±0.5
24.8
+0.3/-0.2
30.2±0.2
154
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SSOP 16S
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
A
Reel Outer Diameter
330.0±1.0
B
Reel Inner Diameter
100.0±1.5
C
Spindle Hole Diameter
D
Key Slit Width
T1
Space Between Flange
T2
Reel Thickness
13.0
+0.5/-0.2
2.0±0.5
12.8
+0.3/-0.2
18.2±0.2
SSOP 20S (150mil), SSOP 24S (150mil), SSOP 28S (150mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
A
Reel Outer Diameter
330.0±1.0
B
Reel Inner Diameter
100.0±1.5
C
Spindle Hole Diameter
D
Key Slit Width
T1
Space Between Flange
T2
Reel Thickness
13.0
+0.5/-0.2
2.0±0.5
16.8
+0.3/-0.2
22.2±0.2
SSOP 48W
Symbol
Description
A
Reel Outer Diameter
B
Reel Inner Diameter
C
Spindle Hole Diameter
D
Key Slit Width
T1
Space Between Flange
T2
Reel Thickness
Rev. 1.10
Dimensions in mm
330.0±1.0
100.0±0.1
13.0
+0.5/-0.2
2.0±0.5
32.2
+0.3/-0.2
38.2±0.2
155
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Carrier Tape Dimensions
P 0
D
P 1
t
E
F
W
D 1
P
B 0
C
K 0
A 0
R e e l H o le
IC
p a c k a g e p in 1 a n d th e r e e l h o le s
a r e lo c a te d o n th e s a m e s id e .
SOP 16N (150mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
W
Carrier Tape Width
16.0±0.3
P
Cavity Pitch
8.0±0.1
E
Perforation Position
1.75±0.1
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
7.5±0.1
D
Perforation Diameter
1.55
+0.10/-0.00
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
1.50
+0.25/-0.00
P0
Perforation Pitch
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
6.5±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
10.3±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
2.1±0.1
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.30±0.05
C
Cover Tape Width
13.3±0.1
Rev. 1.10
156
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SOP 20W
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
24.0
+0.3/-0.1
W
Carrier Tape Width
P
Cavity Pitch
12.0±0.1
E
Perforation Position
1.75±0.10
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
D
Perforation Diameter
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
P0
Perforation Pitch
11.5±0.1
1.5
1.50
+0.1/-0.0
+0.25/-0.00
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
10.8±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
13.3±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
3.2±0.1
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.30±0.05
C
Cover Tape Width
21.3±0.1
SOP 24W
Symbol
W
Description
Dimensions in mm
Carrier Tape Width
24.0±0.3
P
Cavity Pitch
12.0±0.1
E
Perforation Position
1.75±0.1
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
D
Perforation Diameter
1.55
+0.10/-0.00
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
1.50
+0.25/-0.00
P0
Perforation Pitch
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
10.9±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
15.9±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
11.5±0.1
4.0±0.1
3.1±0.1
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.35±0.05
C
Cover Tape Width
21.3±0.1
Rev. 1.10
157
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SOP 28W (300mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
W
Carrier Tape Width
24.0±0.3
P
Cavity Pitch
12.0±0.1
E
Perforation Position
1.75±0.10
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
11.5±0.1
D
Perforation Diameter
1.5
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
1.50
P0
Perforation Pitch
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
10.85±0.10
B0
Cavity Width
18.34±0.10
K0
Cavity Depth
2.97±0.10
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.35±0.01
C
Cover Tape Width
21.3±0.1
+0.1/-0.0
+0.25/-0.00
SSOP 16S
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
12.0
+0.3/-0.1
W
Carrier Tape Width
P
Cavity Pitch
E
Perforation Position
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
D
Perforation Diameter
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
P0
Perforation Pitch
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
6.4±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
5.2±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
2.1±0.1
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
C
Cover Tape Width
Rev. 1.10
8.0±0.1
1.75±0.10
5.5±0.1
1.55±0.10
1.50
+0.25/-0.00
0.30±0.05
9.3±0.1
158
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SSOP 20S (150mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
16.0
+0.3/-0.1
W
Carrier Tape Width
P
Cavity Pitch
E
Perforation Position
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
D
Perforation Diameter
1.5
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
1.50
P0
Perforation Pitch
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
6.5±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
9.0±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
2.3±0.1
8.0±0.1
1.75±0.10
7.5±0.1
+0.1/-0.0
+0.25/-0.00
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.30±0.05
C
Cover Tape Width
13.3±0.1
SSOP 24S (150mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
16.0+0.3/-0.1
W
Carrier Tape Width
P
Cavity Pitch
E
Perforation Position
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
D
Perforation Diameter
1.5+0.1/-0.0
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
1.50+0.25/-0.00
P0
Perforation Pitch
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
6.5±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
9.5±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
2.1±0.1
8.0±0.1
1.75±0.10
7.5±0.1
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.30±0.05
C
Cover Tape Width
13.3±0.1
Rev. 1.10
159
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
SSOP 28S (150mil)
Symbol
Description
Dimensions in mm
W
Carrier Tape Width
16.0±0.3
P
Cavity Pitch
8.0±0.1
E
Perforation Position
1.75±0.1
F
Cavity to Perforation (Width Direction)
7.5±0.1
D
Perforation Diameter
1.55
+0.10/-0.00
D1
Cavity Hole Diameter
1.50
+0.25/-0.00
P0
Perforation Pitch
4.0±0.1
P1
Cavity to Perforation (Length Direction)
2.0±0.1
A0
Cavity Length
6.5±0.1
B0
Cavity Width
10.3±0.1
K0
Cavity Depth
2.1±0.1
t
Carrier Tape Thickness
0.30±0.05
C
Cover Tape Width
13.3±0.1
Rev. 1.10
160
February 9, 2011
HT68F13/HT68F14/HT68F15
Enhanced I/O Flash Type MCU
Holtek Semiconductor Inc. (Headquarters)
No.3, Creation Rd. II, Science Park, Hsinchu, Taiwan
Tel: 886-3-563-1999
Fax: 886-3-563-1189
http://www.holtek.com.tw
Holtek Semiconductor Inc. (Taipei Sales Office)
4F-2, No. 3-2, YuanQu St., Nankang Software Park, Taipei 115, Taiwan
Tel: 886-2-2655-7070
Fax: 886-2-2655-7373
Fax: 886-2-2655-7383 (International sales hotline)
Holtek Semiconductor Inc. (Shenzhen Sales Office)
5F, Unit A, Productivity Building, No.5 Gaoxin M 2nd Road, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, China 518057
Tel: 86-755-8616-9908, 86-755-8616-9308
Fax: 86-755-8616-9722
Holtek Semiconductor (USA), Inc. (North America Sales Office)
46729 Fremont Blvd., Fremont, CA 94538, USA
Tel: 1-510-252-9880
Fax: 1-510-252-9885
http://www.holtek.com
Copyright Ó 2011 by HOLTEK SEMICONDUCTOR INC.
The information appearing in this Data Sheet is believed to be accurate at the time of publication. However, Holtek assumes no responsibility arising from the use of the specifications described. The applications mentioned herein are used
solely for the purpose of illustration and Holtek makes no warranty or representation that such applications will be suitable
without further modification, nor recommends the use of its products for application that may present a risk to human life
due to malfunction or otherwise. Holtek¢s products are not authorized for use as critical components in life support devices
or systems. Holtek reserves the right to alter its products without prior notification. For the most up-to-date information,
please visit our web site at http://www.holtek.com.tw.
Rev. 1.10
161
February 9, 2011